Bibliography of Arabic Linguistics

Arabic Linguistics Society Bibliography of Arabic Linguistics 1979-1994

Bibliography of Arabic Linguistics

(1988). Hindi-Arabic Kosh. New Delhi, Central Hindi Directorate.

'Abd al-Nur, J. (1983). Dictionnaire Abdel-Nour al-Mufassal: Arabe-francais/Mu'jam 'Abd al-Nur al-Mufassal: 'Arabi-faransi. Beirut, Dar al-'ilm lil-malayin.

Aal, H. A. W. A. (1992). A Contrastive Linguistic Study of the Influence of English-Arabic Translation on Journalistic Models in Arabic, with a Special Emphasis on the Egyptian Press, University of Bath.

Aarts, J. and N. Oostdijk (1988). Corpus-Related Research at Nijmegen University. Proc. of Eighth International Conf. on English Lang. Research on Computerized Corpora. Corpus Linguistics, Hard and Soft. M. Kyto, O. Ihalainen and M. Rissanen. Amsterdam, Rodopi. 1988, iii.

Aartun, K. (1981). “Sentences with Specific Particles and the Subjunctive in Arabic.” Oriens. 27-28.

Abaab, H. (1984). “Un transducteur phonologique de l'arabe'.” CGE Compte-rendu: 46.

Abaab, H. (1984**). Contribution au traitement automatique de la langue arabe: conception d'un synthetiseur morpholoqique utilisable en EAO, University of Paris 7.

Abboud, P. F. (1970). Spoken Arabic. Current Trends in Linguistics VI: Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa. T. A. Sebeok. The Hague, Mouton. VI: 439-466.

Abboud, P. F. (1979). “Sibawayhi's Notion of Grammaticality.” Al-‘Arabiyya 12: 58-67.

Abboud, P. F. and E. N. McCarus (1983). Elementary Modern Standard Arabic, parts 1 & 2. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.

Abboud, P. (1986). The Hal Construction and the Main Verb in the Sentence. The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of Language. J. A. Fishman, A. Tabouret-Keller, M. Clyne, B. Krishnamurti and M. Abdulaziz. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 191-196.

Abboud, P. F. (1988). Speech and Religious Affiliation in Egypt. Languages & Cultures: Studies in Honour of Edgar C. Polome. M. A. Jazayery and W. Winter. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 21-27.

Abd El-Moneim, A. A. (1989). The Role of INFL, The University of Connecticut.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3932A

Abd El-Moneim, A. A. (1989). “Agreement in standard Arabic verbal clauses.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Sciences 6.1: 21-29.

Abd-Rabbo, M. Z. (1988). Some Morphological Constraints in Classical Arabic, Stanford University.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:2637A

Abd-Rabbo, M. Z. (1990). Sound Plural and Broken Plural Assignment in Classical Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 55-93.

Abdel Haleem, M. A. S. (1992). “Grammatical Shift for Rhetorical Purposes: Iltifat and Related Features in the Qur'an.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 55(3): 407-432.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. E. (1981). Lexical and Phonological Variation in Spoken Arabic in Amman, University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:4814A

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. (1983). Sex Differentiation and Linguistic Variation : Case Study of Spoken Arabic in Amman. Second Annual Linguistics Conference, Irbid, Yarmouk University Dept. of English.

http://www.lib.umich.edu/area/Near.East/ALSLING.html (1 of 91) [09/21/01 16:37:11]


Abdel-Jawad, H. R. (1986). “The emergence of an urban dialect in the Jordaian urban centers.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 5: 53-63.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. (1986). “A linguistic and sociocultural study of personal names in Jordan.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 80-94.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. (1987). “Cross-dialectal variation in Arabic: competing prestigious forms.” Language in Society 16(3): 359-68.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. and I. Abu-Salim (1987). “Slips of the tongue in Arabic and their theoretical implications.” Language Sciences 9(2(66)): 145-71.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. (1989). “Language and women's place with special reference to Arabic.” Language Sciences 11(3): 305-324.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. and M. Awwad (1989). “Reflexes of Classical Arabic Interdentals: A Study in Historical Sociolinguistics.” Linguistische Berichte 122(Aug): 259-282.

Abdel-Jawad, H. R. and S. M. Suleiman (1990). “Lexical Conditioning of Phonological Variation.” Language Sciences 12(4): 291-330.

Abdel-Karim, A. (1985). “From a free Arabic text to its word frequency table: the search for the solution.” Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Informatics SP: 16-19.

Abdelfattah, N. M. S. (1990). Linguistic Changes in Journalistic Language in Egypt, 1935-1989: A Quantitative and Comparative Analysis, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:3397A

Abdeljaber, N. (1985). Evaluation of Ibn Madaa’s Criticism of the Arab Grammarians, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:1918A

Abdelmoumene, N. (1988). Sentential Complementation in French, English and Arabic, University of Essex (UK).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:428A

Abdo, D. (1977). “Alifat am Hamazat.” Al-‘Arabiyya 10(1-2): 46-54.

Abdrabou, A. A. (1988). “Relationship between Translation and Text Linguistics.” Journal of English 16(1988 Sept): 1-7.

Abdu, H. R. (1988). Italian Loanwords in Colloquial Libyan Arabic as Spoken in the Tripoli Region, University of Arizona.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1251A

Abdul-Fadl (1961). Volkstümliche Texte in arabischen Bauerndialekte der ägyptischen Provinz Sharqiyya mit dialektgeographischen Untersuchungen zur Lautlehre.

Abdul-Ghany, M. K. E. (1981). Government Binding in Classical Arabic, University of Texas at Austin.

Abdul-Hassan, R. S. (1988). Variation in the Educated Spoken Arabic of Iraq: A Sociolinguistic Study, University of Leeds (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2877A

Abdul-Karim, K. W. (1980). Aspects of the Phonology of Lebanese Arabic, University of Illnois-Urbana.

Abdulaziz, M. H. (1986). “Factors in the development of modern Arabic usage.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 62: 11-24.

Abdullah, T. N. (1990). “Irregular forms of triliteral nouns.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 7.1: 41-64.

Abdurakhman, K. N. (1988). “Semantika padezhei v russkom i arabskom iazykakh.” Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom 1: 86-90.

Abed, E., N. Ali, et al. (1987). “Information content in textual data: revisited for Arabic text.” Jounal of the American Society for Information Science 38(2): 133-37.

Abel, F. (1985). “Gestes de conversation dans le constantinois.” Geste & Image 4: 39-67.



Abellan Perez, J. (1981). “Contribucion de la linguistica historica al conocimiento del medievo albojense.” Awraq (Madrid) 4: 31-35.

Abi-aad, A. (1980). Systeme verbal et expression du temps et de la modalite en arabe et en francais. Linguistique et enseignement des langues. J. P. Davoine. Lyon, PU de Lyon: 263-318.

Abu El-Haija, L. A. (1981). The Acquisition of the Negation System in Arabic as Spoken in Jordan, Pennsylvania State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 42: 3134A

Abu Libdeh, A. a. J. (1991). A Discourse Perspective on Figurative Expression in Literary Works with Reference to English/Arabic Translation, Heriot-Watt University (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:3258A

Abu Nahleh, L. Y. (1985). A Syntactic-Semantic Analysis of Object Clitics and Pronouns in Ramallah Palestinian Arabic, The University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:164A

Abu Ra'ad, A. M. S. (1990). “Semantic development of purification (at-Taharah) as linguistic and juristic technical terms.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 7.2: 73-100.

Abu-Absi, S. (1981). “Language-in-Education in the Arab Middle East.” Annual Review of Applied Linguistics: 129-143.

Abu-Absi, S. (1984). “Language Planning and Education in the Arab World.” International Education Journal 1(2): 113-132.

Abu-Absi, S. (1986). “The modernization of Arabic: problems and prospects.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(3): 337-48.

Abu-Absi, S. (1990). “A Characterization of the Language of Iftah ya Simsim: Sociolinguistic and Educational Implications for Arabic.” Language Problems and Language Planning 14(1): 33-46.

Abu-Ghazaleh, I. N. (1983). Theme and the function of the verb in Palestinian Arabic narrative discourse, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:1738A

Abu-Haidar, F. (1979). A Study of the Spoken Arabic of Baskinta, Leiden: Brill.

Abu-Haidar, F. (1987). “The treatment of the reflexes of /q/ and /k/ in the Muslim dialect of Baghdad.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 41-57.

Abu-Haidar, J. A. (1989). “The Diminutives in the Diwan of Ibn Quzman: A Product of Their Hispanic Milieu?” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 52(2): 239-254.

Abu-Haidar, F. (1992). Shifting Boundaries: The effect of MSA on dialect convergence in Baghdad. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 91-106.

Abu-Haider, F. (1988). “Speech Variation in the Muslim Dialect of Baghdad-Urban vs. Rural.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 74-80.

Abu-Haider, F. (1989). “Are Iraqi Women More Prestige Conscious Than Men? Sex Differentiation in Baghdadi Arabic.” Language in Society 18(4): 471-481.

Abu-Haider, F. (1990). “Maintenance and Shift in the Christian Arabic of Baghdad.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21: 47-62.

Abu-Jarad, H. A. (1986). English Interlanguage of Palestinian University Students in Gaza Strip: An Analysis of Relative Clauses and Verb Tense, Ball State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:518A

Abu-Mansour, A. H. (1986). A functional analysis of sentence structure in standard Arabic: a three-level approach, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:913A

Abu-Mansour, M. (1987). A Nonlinear Analysis of Arabic Syllabic Phonology with Special Reference to Makkan, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:2859A



Abu-Mansour, M. H. (1990). Epenthesis, Gemination and Syllable Structure. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 167-191.

Abu-Mansour, M. H. (1991). Epenthesis in Makkan Arabic: Unsyllabified Consonants v. Degenerate Syllables. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 3: 137-154.

Abu-Mansour, M. (1992). Vowel Shortening in Two Arabic Dialects. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 47-76.

Abu-Melhim, A.-R. (1991). Code-Switching and Linguistic Accommodation in Arabic. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 231-250.

Abu-Nahleh, L. (1982). “The scope and function of language repair in foreigner discourse.” Interlanguage Studies Bulletin - Utrecht 6(1): 112-20.

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1980). “Epenthesis and geminate consonants in Palestinian Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 1-12.

Abu-Salim, I. (1982). “Syllable structure and syllabification in Palestinian Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 12(1): 1-28.

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1982). A reanalysis of some aspects of Arabic phonology: a metrical approach, University of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:2981A

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1982). “Syllable Structure and Syllabification in Palestinian Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences vol. 12 no. 1(1982 Spring): 1-28.

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1986). “Vowel shortening in Palestinian Arabic: a metrical perspective.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 68(2-3): 223-40.

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1987). “Vowel harmony in Palestinian Arabic: a metrical perspective.” Journal of Linguistics 23(1): 1-24.

Abu-Salim, I. M. and H. R. Abd-el-Jawad (1988). “Syllable Patterns in Levantine Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 18(2): 1-22.

Abu-Salim, I. M. (1988). “Consonant Assimilation in Arabic: An Autosegmental Perspective.” Lingua 74(1): 45-66.

Abubakre, R. D. (1983). “The Learning of Arabic by Yoruba Speakers.” Jolan: Journal of the Linguistic Association of Nigeria 2: 143-152.

Abuhamdia, Z. A. (1988). The Arabic Language regions. Sociolinguistics: an international handbook of the science of language and society. U. Ammon, N. Dittmar and K. J. Mattheier. Berlin, de Gruyter: 1238 -1244.

Abumdas, A. H. A. (1985). Libyan Arabic Phonology, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 46: 1918A

Abunahleh, L. and others (1981). “The Scope and Function of Language Repair in Foreigner Discourse.” Interlanguage Studies Bulletin 6(1): 112-120.

Abutajdine, D. and others (1988). Reconstruction of Arabic long vowels using time varying linear prediction technique. ICASSP 88 (International Conference on Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing, New York.

Achour, C. (1990). “Toward a history of French in the colonies-The case of Algeria.” Etudes de Linguistique Appliquee 78: 87-96.

Addeweesh, R. A. (1985). A Syntactic and Semantic Study of Hal: "Circumstantial" Structures in Modern Literary Arabic Prose Literature., University of Michgan.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:1959A

Affi, E. A. (1988). Linguistic Perspectives of Interlingual Translation.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:2614A



Aftat, M. (1982). The Acquisition of Negation and Wh-Questions in a Moroccan Arabic Speaking Four-Year-Old Child, University of Texas-Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:783A

Agius, D. A. (1980). “Maltese: A Semitic and romance language.” Al-‘Arabiyya 13(1-2): 14-27.

Agius, D. A. (1981). “A Semitic Maltese Inventory with a Possible Siculo-Arabic Intervention.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik (ZAL) 6: 7-15.

Agius, D. A. (1982). “Semitic and Romance: the two elements forming Maltese.” The USF Language Quarterly 21(1-2): 21-4.

Agius, D. A. (1984). Arabic Literary Works as a Source of Documentation for Technical Terms of the Material Culture. Berlin, Schwarz.

Agius, D. A. (1989). “Arabic under Shidyaq in Malta 1833-1848.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 52-57.

Ahmad, A. H. (1983). The Acquistion of Vocabulary of English as a Second Language by Arabic Native Children, University College of North Wales Dept. of Linguistics, Bangor. U.K.

Ait Taleb, S. (1987). “Arabic as a technological language: Problems and perspectives (L’Arabe, langue technologique, problemes et perspectives).” Le Langage et l’Homme 22(2(64)): 105-11.

Ait-Oumeziane, R. (1986). “The status of the function “subject” in two Arabic Dialects: Constantine and Tripoli (Le statut de la fonction "sujet" dans deux parlers arabes: Constantine et Tripoli).” Linguistique 22(1): 81-92.

Ait-Oumeziane, R. (1986). “The teaching of grammar to Arabic native speakers: The solution of contrastive pragmatics.” Contrastes 12: 53-70.

Ait-Oumeziane, R. (1986). “Le Statut de la fonction 'sujet' dans deux parlers arabes: Constantine et Tripoli.” La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Internationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle 22(1): 81-92.

Ait-Oumeziane, R. (1988). “Vowel Contrasts and Phonological Variation. The Example of French and of Mahgreb Arabic.” Contrastes 16(May): 81-101.

Akesson, J. (1990). Ahmad b. 'Ali b. Mas'ud on Arabic Morphology: Marah al-arwah: Edited with Translation, Commentary and Introduction, Lunds Universitet (Sweden).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:36C

Akesson, J. (1991). “The Strong Verb and Infinitive Noun in Arabic.” Acta Orientalia 52: 35-48.

Akinnaso, F. N. and I. A. Ogunbiyi (1990). “The Place of Arabic in Language Education and Language Planning in Nigeria.” Language Problems and Language Planning 12(1): 1-19.

Akram, M. and A. M. Sa’adeddin (1987). “Target-world experiential matching: the case of Arabic/English translating.” Quinquereme 10(2): 137-164.

Al-Abed Al-Haq, F. M. (1985). A Case Study of Language Planning in Jordan, University of Wisconsin-Madison.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:884A

Al-Aboudi, F. B. S. (1985). The Syntax of 'Idafah', Annexation in Arabic, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:2677

Al-Ani, S. (1976). The development and distribution of the Arabic sound 'qaf' in Iraq. Essays on Islamic Civilization. D. P. Little. Leiden, E.J. Brill: 48-55.

Al-Ani, S., R. F. Port, et al. (1980). “Temporal compensation and universal phonetics.” Journal of Phonetica 37: 235-252.

Al-Ani, S. H. and J. Y. Al-Shammas (1980). The Phonology and Script of Literary Arabic. Montreal, Institute of Islamic Studies, McGill University.



Al-Ani, S. and M. El-Dalee (1984). Tafkhim in Arabic: The Acoustic and Physiological Parameters. Proceedings of the Xth International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, Utrecht, The Netherlands.

Al-Ani, S. (1985). “From Arabic Sounds to Pictures.” Islamic Horizons Nov./Dec.(1985): 11and 22.

Al-Ani, S. and J. Y. Shammas (1985). Phonology and Script of Literary Arabic. Troy, MI (1980) and Bloomington, IN (1985), Internat'l Book Centre (1980) and Internat'l Institute of Islamic and Arabic Studies (1985).

Al-Ani, S. (1987). Abstract and Concrete Interaction in the Arabic Sound System. Islamic and Middle Eastern Societies. R. Olson and S. Al-Ani, Amana Books: 209-217.

Al-Ani, S. H. and Y. Ahmad (1988). “A Report on the Symposium Dealing with Advancement in Speech Technology for Arabic.” Arab Journal for the Humanities 8: 326-337.

Al-Ani, S. (1989). Advancement in Speech Technology (in Arabic). Basic College of Education Annual Book. Kuwait City, Kuwait University: 422-434.

Al-Ani, S. and S. Tel (1991). “Interlingual and Intralanguage Interference in English-Arabic Bilinguals.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies VIII(No. 1): 61-80.

Al-Ani, S., Ed. (1992). Readings in Arabic Linguistics. Bloomington, Indiana University Linguistics Club.

Al-Ani, S. (1992). “Lexical Stress Variation in Arabic: An Acoustic Spectrographic Analysis.” Proceedings of the Colloquium on Arabic Grammar: The Arabist 1992: 9-27.

Al-Ani, S. (1993). “Stress Variation of the Adjective Phrase in Arabic.” Anthropological Linguistics 1993.

Al-Ani, S. (1994). The Treatise of Ibna Sina: An Original Contribution to Arabic Phonetics. Investigating Arabic: Linguistic, Pedagogical and Literary Studies in Honor of Ernest N. McCarus. R. Rammuny and D. Parkinson, Greyden Press. 1993.

Al-As'ad, A. K. M. (1984). “Fundamental Trends in the Studies of Arabic Grammar.” Journal of College of Arts, King Saud University 11(1): 245-263.

Al-Aswad, M. K. (1984). Contrastive Analysis of Arabic and English Verbs in Tense, Aspect, and Structure.Dissertation Abstracts International 44:3046A

Al-Badarin, M. (1988). “The Representation of Geminates in Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 5.1: 59-76.

Al-Batal, M. M. A. (1985). The cohesive role of connectives in a modern expository Arabic text, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:1960A

Al-Batal, M. (1990). Connectives as Cohesive Elements in a Modern Expository Arabic Text. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 234-268.

Al-Batal, M. (1994). Connectives in Arabic Diglossia: The case of Lebanese Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 91-119.

Al-Bazi, M. (1983). Scopal Properties of the Arabic Relative Clause, University of Washington.

Al-Besbasi, I. A. (1991). An Empirical Investigation of Some Cognitive Processes of Translation between English and Arabic with Special Reference to the Use of Dictionaries (Volumes I and II), University of Exeter (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:3258A

Al-Chalabi, S. A. R. (1984). Modern Arabic Terminology and Bilingual Lexicography: Activities and Problems. Papers from Summer Inst. on ESP in Arab World Held at Univ. of Aston in Birmingham, in Aug. 1983. English for Specific Purposes in the Arab World. J. Swales and H. Mustafa. Birmingham, Language Studies Unit, University of Aston: 280-291.

Al-Fassi Al-Fahri, A. (1989). “Grammatical theory and parsing.” ProcKuw2: 221-271.



Al-Haq, F. A.-A. (1989). “Implication of language planning into Arabization in Jordan.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 6.2: 19-34.

Al-Haq, F. A.-A. (1992). “Functional or Anaphoric Control in Jordanian Arabic.” Language Sciences (LangS) 14(1-2, 1992 Jan-Apr): 1-28.

Al-Harbi, A. (1990). A Syntactic Approach to Arabic Verbal Morphology, University of Essex (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:1729A

Al-Harbi, A. A. A.-A. (1991). Arabic Loanwords in Acehnese. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Lingistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 93-117.

Al-Hroot, A. K. (1987). Some Aspects of Deletion in Arabic, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:2324A

Al-Hroot, A. (1989). “Invisible subject pronouns in Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 6.1: 39-55.

Al-Imam, Y. and F. Al-Khalifa (1989). “Computer aided study of stress rules in Modern Standard Arabic.” Arab Journal for Humanities 9(34).

Al-Jabr, A. M. (1987). Cohesion in Text Differentiation: A Study of English and Arabic, University of Aston in Birmingham (UK).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:51A

Al-Jehani, N. M. (1990). “Color Terms in Mecca: A Sociolinguistic Perspective.” Anthropological Linguistics 32(1-2): 163-174.

Al-Jihani, N. M. (1985). Sociostylisitc Stratification of Arabic in Makkah, University of Michigan.

Al-Johani, M. H. (1982). English and Arabic Articles: A Contrastive Analysis in Definiteness and Indefiniteness, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:2649A

Al-Jubouri, A. J. R. (1984). The Role of Repetition in Arabic Argumentative Discourse. Papers from Summer Inst. on ESP in Arab World Held at Univ. of Aston in Birmingham, in Aug. 1983. English for Specific Purposes in the Arab World. J. Swales and H. Mustafa. Birmingham, Language Studies Unit, University of Aston: 99-117.

Al-Jubouri, A. J. R. (1987). Computer-Aided Categorisation and Quantifaication of Connectives in English and Arabic, University of Aston in Birmingham (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:348C

Al-Jubouri, A. J. R. and F. E. Knowles (1988). A Computer-Assisted Study of Cohesion Based on English and Arabic Corpora: An Interim Report. Proc. of Thirteenth Internat. Conf., Univ. of E. Anglia (Norwich), 1-4 Apr. 1986. Computers in Literary and Linguistic Research. J. P. G. Roper. Paris; Geneva, Champion; Slatkine: 59-77.

Al-Kahtany, A. H. (1992). Anaphoric Relations in Arabic and English Spoken Narratives, Michigan State University.DAI No. DA9223166

Al-Kenai, J. B. S. (1985). Some Linguistic and Cultural Problems of English-Arabic Translation and Their Implications for a Strategy of Arabization, University of Glasgow (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:1291A

Al-Khamash, S. S. (1991). Addad: A Study of Homo-Polysemous Opposites in Arabic, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:2905A

Al-Khatib, M. A. A. (1988). Sociolinguistic Change in an Expanding Urban Context: A Case Study of Irbid City, Jordan, University of Durham (UK).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:2195A

Al-Khrisat, M. M. (1992). Structuring the Arabic Lexicon and Thesaurus with Lexical-Semantic Relations to Support Information Retrieval, Illinois Institute of Technology.



Dissertation Abstracts International 53:4769B

Al-Mozainy, H. Q., R. Vroman Bley, et al. (1985). “Stress shift and metrical structure.” Linguistic Inquiry 16(1): 135-44.

Al-Muhannadi, M. (1992). A Sociolinguistic Study of Women's Speech in Qatar, University of Essex.DAI No. BRD-95293

Al-Najjar, M. F. (1984). Translation as a correlative of meaning: cultural and linguistic transfer between Arabic and English, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:1382A

Al-Najjar, B. (1984). The syntax and semantics of verbal aspect in Kuwaiti Arabic, University of Utah.Dissertation Abstracts International 44:3673A

Al-Najjar, B. (1991). “Grammaticalization of Lexical Markers in Kuwaiti Arabic.” Folia LInguistica: Acta Societatis Linguisticae Europae (FoLi) 25(3-4, 1991): 665-675.

Al-Nasser, A. (1986). Sibawayh the phonologist. A critical study of the phonetic and phonological theory of Sibawayh as presented in his treatise Al-Kitab. London & New York, Kegan Paul International.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:11C

Al-Nattafi, M. T. (1984). “The rhyming vowels in Al-Mutanabbi’s poetry.” Journal of College of Arts 11(2): 728-47.

Al-Qadi, W. (1981). Studia Arabica et Islamica. Festschrift for Ihsan 'Abbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. Beirut, American Univ. of Beirut.

Al-Qadi, N. S. (1991). Acquisition of English Derivational Morphology by Arab Speakers, University of Georgia.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:896A

Al-Qadi, N. S. (1992). “The Acquisition of English Derivational Morphology by Arab Speakers: Empirical Testing.” Language Sciences (LangS) 14(1-2 1992 Jan-Apr).

Al-Qahtani, D. M. (1988). Semantic Valence of Arabic Verbs (Volumes I and II), Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:934A

Al-Rufai, M. (1983). “Cultural effect on the comprehensibility of reading texts.” Jyvaskyla Cross-Language Studies 10: 35-46.

Al-Sadeqi, F. (1990). A Tagmemic Analysis of Al-Buxalaa', The University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:2727A

Al-Shabab, O. S. (1987). Organizational and Textual Structuring of Radio News Discourse in English and Arabic, University of Aston in Birmingham (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:348C

Al-Shabbab, O. and J. Swales (1986). “Rhetorical features of Arab and British news broadcasts.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 31-42.

Al-Shahi, A. (1988). “Some Personal Names and Nicknames among the Riverain People of Northern Sudan.” Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford 19(2): 131-139.

Al-Shahrani, S. A. (1988). The Phonology of the Spoken Arabic of the Shahran Tribe in Southwestern Saudi Arabia, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1785A

Al-Shalan, A. (1983). Word Order and Passivization in Arabic, University of Washington.

Al-Sharhan, A. A. (1988). Language in Education in the United Arab Emirates: A Sociolinguistic Approach, University of Essex (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:3347A



Al-Sharyofi, E. (1992). Topic-Comment Constructions in Arabic: A Syntactic Approach, Indiana University.DAI No. DA9231530

Al-Sughayer, K. I. (1990). Aspects of Comparative Jordanian and Modern Standard Arabic Phonology, Michigan State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:148A

Al-Sweel, A. (1983). Word Order in Standard Arabic: A Lexical Approach, University of Washington.

Al-Sweel, A. A. I. (1987). “Verbal and nominal forms of Najdi Arabic.” Anthropological Linguistics 29(1): 71-90.

Al-Sweel, A. I. (1990). “Some Aspects of Najdi Arabic Phonology.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21: 71-82.

Al-Tajir, M. A. (1982). Language and Linguistic Origins in Bahrain: The Baharna Dialect of Arabic. London, Kegan Paul International.

Al-Tarouti, A. F. (1992). Temporality in Arabic Grammar and Discourses, Univ. of California, Los Angeles.DAI No. DA9200915

Al-Tayan, M. (1983). The incompatibility of consonants and its role in the coining of Arabic words between the classical heritage and new statistics, Damascus University.

Al-Tonis, A. (1980). Egyptian colloquial Arabic ; A structure review. Cairo, American University in Cairo.

Al-Umar, M. M. and M. A. Awad (1988). “The relationship between the verb and the time of occurrence in Classical Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 5.2: 52-89.

Al-Waer, M. (1983). “Towards a modern and realistic sentential theory of basic structures in standard Arabic.” Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Proceedings: 195-201.

Al-Waer, M. (1984). Toward a Modern and Realistic Sentential Theory of Basic Structures in Standard Arabic.Dissertation Abstracts International 44:3046A

Al-Waer, M. (1989). “The syntactic and semantic analysis of the generation of the Arabic sentence.” ProcKuw2: 172-220.

Al-Wer, E. E. (1992). Phonological Variation in the Speech of Women from Three Urban Areas in Jordan, University of Essex.DAI No. BRD-95013

Albers, H.-G. (1987). “Text reception and processing: Culture-specific conditions of test comprehension in German as a Second Language Instruction-The case of Arabic students (Textwahrnehmung und texterfahrung. kulturspezifische bedingungen des textverstandnisses im unterricht Deutsch als Fremdsprache-dargestellt am Beispiel arabischsprachiger).” Zielsprache Deutsch 18(3): 9-21.

Alexandru, D. and others (1983). “Some errors in the acquisition of Romanian by Arabic speakers.” Analele Universitatii din Timisoara, Seria stiinte filologice 21: 83-87.

Alfalahi, H. A. (1981). The Relationship between Discourse Universals and Discourse Structure of English and Arabic, University of South Carolina.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3135A

Alghamdi, M. M. A. (1990). Analysis, Synthesis and Perception of Voicing in Arabic, University of Reading (United Kindom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:2124A

Alghazo, M. H. (1987). Syncope and Epenthesis in Levantine Arabic: A Nonlinear Approach, University of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:1753A

Alharbi, L. M. (1992). Formal Analysis of Intonation: The Case of the Kuwaiti Dialect of Arabic, Heriot-Watt University.DAI No. BRDX94559

Ali, L. H. (1970). “Some Aspects of Negation in English and Baghdadi Arabic.” Archivum Linguisticum N.S. 1(1970): 67-83.

Ali, L. H. (1983). “Remarks on “particle movement” and “extraposition from NP” rules: a study in contrastive analysis.” Papers and Studies



in Contrastive Linguistics 16: 33-41.

Ali, S. S. (1988). “Symbol, Deviation, and Culture-Bound Expression as a Source of Error in Arabic-English Poetic Translation.” Babel 34(4): 211-221.

Ali, N. (1988). Arabic syntax from a computational linguistic perspective. 2nd International Conference of the Linguistic Society of Morocco, Rabat.

Ali, S. S. (1992). “Misrepresentation of Some Ellipted Structures in the Translation of the Qur'an: An Analytical Study.” Meta: Journal des Traducteurs/Translators' Journal 37(no. 3 1992 Sept): 487-490.

Ali Bouacha, A. (1992). “La Generalisation dans le discours: Langues officielles et discours de bois.” Langages 105: 100-113.

Alio, K. (1988). “Conjugation in Bidiya, a Chadic Language in Guera, Chad, and the Integration of Verbs Borrowed from French and Arabic.” Cahiers du LACITO 3: 81-93.

Alioua, A. (1985). “A Phonetic Study of [au] and [ai] in Literal Arabic: Acoustic Analysis Based on Spectrography [Moroccan Speaker].” Travaux de l'Institut de Phonetique de Strasbourg 17: 13-44.

Alpatov, V. M. (1990). “On the Comparative Study of Linguistic Traditions [The Statement of the Problem].” Voprosy Yazykoznaniya 39(2): 13-25.

Alrabaa, S. (1985). “The Use of Address Pronouns by Egyptian Adults: A Sociolinguistic Study.” Journal of Pragmatics: An Interdisciplinary Bi-monthly of Language Studies 9(5): 645-657.

Alrabaa, S. (1986). “Diglossia in the classroom: the Arabic case.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 73-79.

Alrabaa, S. (1987). “Social usage of address forms in Egypt: a sociolinguistic study.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 123-9.

AlShamma’, G. (1986). “A sociolinguistic study of some basic characteristics of expression of the Syrian Arab personality.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 106-14.

Altoma, S. J. (1970). Language Education in Arab Countries and the Role of the Academies. Current Trends in Linguistics, VI: Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa. T. A. Sebeok and others. The Hague, Mouton. VI: 690-720.

Altoma, S. J. (1980). “Toward unified linguistics terminology.” Al-‘Arabiyya 13(1-2): 51-64.

Alvar, M. (1992). “Del castellano al espanol.” Cuadernos Hispanoamericanos: Revista Mensual de Cultura Hispanica 500: 7-39.

Alvarez-Pereyre, F. (1987). “Linguistics and Oral Traditions: The Case of the Jewish Languages.” Cahiers du LACITO 2: 157-172.

Alwan, A. (1989). “Perceptual Cues for Place of Articulation for the Voiced Pharyngeal and Uvular Consonants.” Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 86(2): 549-556.

Amaireh, K. (1981). “Various Elements Ascertaining Meaning in Arabic Grammar.” Journal of Semitic Studies 26(Spring): 31-45.

Amaireh, K. (1982). “The affective meaning of some exclamatory styles in Arabic grammar.” Al-‘Arabiyya 15(1-2): 66-81.

Amaireh, K. (1984). “Generative Transformational Theory and its Arabic Grammatical Origin.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 1.2: 69-87.

Amaireh, K. (1984). “Aspects of Classification and Functional Syntax in Classical Arabic Grammar.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 1.1: 33-54.

Amaireh, K. (1989). “The semantic value of the relative pronoun in Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 6.1: 75-94.

Amara, M. H. and B. Spolsky (1986). “The diffusion and integration of Hebrew and English lexical items in the spoken Arabic of an Israeli village.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 43-54.



Amara, M. H. (1986). The Integration of English and Hebrew Lexical Items into the Arabic Spoken in an Arab Village in Israel, Bar-Ilan University.

Amara, M. (1988). “Arabic Diglossia: Conditions for Learning Standard Arabic.” Al-Jadid 12: 14-23.

Amara, M. (1989). “Developments and Changes in the Palestinian Arab Village in Israel: Zalafa as an example.” Matba't Alairat, Umm Al-Fahm.

Amayreh, M. A. (1988). “An Analytical Study of Modern Arabic Linguistic Terms.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 5.2: 91-111.

Amayreh, M. A. (1989). “The basic structural features of Arabic: a comparative study.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 6.2: 85-105.

Amayreh, I. (1991). “The orientalists and the history of their relationsip with the Arabic language.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Sciences 8.2: 29-54.

Ambros, A. A. (1984). “Einige Bemerkungen zu 'Having' in Arabic (ZAL 11).” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 13: 91-93.

Ambros, A. A. (1987). “Lakin and Lakinna in the Koran.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 21-30.

Ambros, A. A. (1988). “Reflections on ficl of Pairing and Equivalence.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 27-31.

Ambros, A. A. (1989). “Syntaktische und stilistische Funktionen des Energikus im Koran.” Wiener Zeits. für die Kunde des Morgenlandes 79: 35-56.

Amilcar Cipriano, N. (1979). “Introduction to the Study of the Comma [Continuation].” Yelmo 42-43(Oct-Mar): 5-6.

Amir'iants, I. A. (1980). Predaniia o nazvaniiakh nekotorykh arabskikh gorodov. Onomastika Vostoka. E. M. Murzaev, V. A. Nikonov and V. V. Tsybul'skii. Moscow, Nauka: 170-173.

Anani, M. (1980). “Some phonetic differences between Arabic and English vowels.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikatiosnforschung 33: 709-14.

Anani, M. (1983). “Some differences between Arabic and English comparative structures.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 17: 79-84.

Anani, M. (1985). “Differences in distribution between Arabic /l/, /r/ and English /l/, /r/.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 20: 129-33.

Anani, M. (1985). “Phonetic description of Arabic consonants by early Arab linguists.” The Bulletin, The Phonetic Sociey of Japan 179: 14-17.

Anani, M. (1988). “Arabic and English Imperative Structures.” IRAL 26(3): 239-243.

Anani, M. (1989). “Incorrect Stress Placement in the Case of Arab Learners of English.” IRAL 27(1): 15-21.

Anghelescu, N. (1981). “Observations on the genesis of general and specific meaning in an epistle of al-Marzuqi.” Historiographia Linguistics 8(2-3): 237-48.

Anghelescu, N. (1981). “"To Dare To Say" in Arabic.” Revue Roumaine de LInguistique 26(4): 323-327.

Anghelescu, N. (1982). “Elements of a theory of modality from the old Arab grammarians.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 27(4): 287-91.

Anghelescu, N. (1985). “New studies on the history of Arabic grammar.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 30(2): 185-8.

Anghelescu, N. (1985). “Arabic linguistic thought from a contemporary perspective (Gindirea lingvistica araba in perspectiva contemporana).” Studii si cercetari lingvistice 36(3): 175-8.



Anghelescu, N. (1985). “The theoretical/normative relation in various periods of Classical Arabic Grammar.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 1-10.

Anghelescu, N. (1985). “Indefinite, Partitive, and Approximation in Arabic.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 30(6): 521-524.

Anghelescu, N. (1985). “The Arabic form ‘afalu: A typological approach.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 30(3): 249-54.

Anghelescu, N. (1988). “Aspect in Arabic: Suggestions for an Analysis.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 33(5): 343-353.

Angoujard, J. P. (1981). “Marqueur du feminin et systeme vocalique dans l'arabe de Damas.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28( June-Sept.): 345-357.

Angoujard, J.-P. (1986). “Prosodic Hierarchies in Arabic (Les hierarchies prosodiques en arabe).” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 11-38.

Angoujard, J.-P. (1987). Metrical Structure of Arabic. Providence, RI, Foris Publications.

Angoujard, J.-P. (1987). Accentuation et Syncope Dans Le Parler du Caire: Quels Parametres? Current Approaches to African Linguistics. D. Odden. Dordrecht, Foris: 13-10.

Angoujard, J.-P. and K. El-Mejjad (1988). “Prosodic Aspects of the Speech of Marrakesh.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 18: 7-32.

Angoujard, J.-P. (1988). “La Place de la syllabe dans une phonologie pluri-lineaire.” Recherches Linguistiques de Vincennes 17: 17-28.

Anwar, M. S. (1979). “Remarks on a Collection of Speech Errors.” International Journal of Psycholinguistics 6(2(14)): 59-72.

Anwar, M. S. (1980). Morpheme Structure Conditions as Phonological Rules. Phonologica. W. Dressler, Innsbruck: 1-8.

Anwar, M. S. (1981). “The Legitimate Fathers of Speech Errors.” Historiographia Lingustica 8(2-3): 249-265.

Aoun, Y. (1979). “Is the Syllable or the Supersyllable a constituent?” MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 1: 140-148.

Aoun, Y. (1981). “ECP, move, and subjacency.” Linguistic Inquiriy 12(4): 637-45.

Aoun, Y. and D. Sportiche (1981). “The Domain of Weak Cross-Over Restrictions.” MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 3: 43-52.

Aoun, Y. (1982). Expletive PROs. A. Marantz: 1-4.

Arkoun, M. (1981). “Etudes de linguistique arabe.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.).

Armagost, J. L. (1977). On Disjunctive Ordering. Papers from the 1975 Mid-America Linguistics Conference. F. Ingemann. Lawrence, Linguistic Dept., Univ. of Kansas: 13-26.

Armistead, S. G. and J. T. Monroe (1983). “Albas, mammas, and code-switching the Kharjas: a reply to Keith Whinnom.” La Coronoica: Spanish Medieval Language and Literature Journal and Newsletter 11(2): 174-207.

Arveiller, R. (1979). “Guaral and Reptile.” Travaux de Linguistique et de Litterature 17(1): 87-96.

Arveiller, R. (1980). Notes lexicales: Termes de voyage. Linguistique romane et linguistique francaise: Hommages a Jacques Pohl. M. Dominicy and M. Wilmet. Brussels, Ed. de l'Univ. de Bruxelles: 21-37.

Asfoor, M. A. (1982). Difficulties English speakers encounter in Arabic phonology, University of San Francisco.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:1129A

Ashoor, A. A. and T. Prochazka, Jr. (1982). “Saudi Arabic Speech Audiometry.” Audiology/Audiologie 21(6): 493-508.

Ashoor, A. A. and T. Prochazka, Jr. (1985). “Saudi Arabic Speech Audiometry for Children.” British Journal of Audiology 19(3): 229-238.

Assaf, A. S. (1989). The Interrogative System of English Interlanguage: A Performance Analysis of Arabic-Speaking Adult Learners'



Acquisition of English Oral interrogatives, Stanford University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3835A

Assubaiai, S. H. (1979). Empirical bases for the interlanguage of Arab students learning English, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:1566A

Ata, I. W. (1981). “Stubborn Structures in 'Arabic' English.” Journal of the School of Languages 8: 158-163.

Atallah, W. (1979). “Etymologie de Qur'an, le Coran.” Folia Orientalia (FoliaO) 20: 97-105.

Atari, O. F. (1983). A contrastive analysis of Arab and American university students: strategies in accomplishing written English discourse functions: implications for EFL, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 44:3047A

Atawneh, A. (1992). Code-Mixing in the Speech of Arabic-English Bilinguals. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 219-244.

Atawneh, A. M. A.-H. (1992). Politeness Theory and the Directive Speech-Act in Arabic English Bilinguals: An Empirical Study, University of New York, Stony Brook.DAI No. DA9219306

Aurayieth, A. (1982). The Phonology of the Verb in Libyan Arabic, University of Washington.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:3305A

Avishur, Y. (1990). “'hyh' 'sr' 'huh' in Arabic, Syriac, and Judeo-Arabic.” Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects 55(1-2, 1990 Sept-Dec).

Avram, A. (1983). “On the distinctive phonological traits of nasal consonants.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 28(4): 293-7.

Awad, G., G. Bohas, et al. (1982). “Analyse automatique de la rime en poésie arabe.” Études Arabes 1: 18-30.

Awad, G. (1985). “La morphophonologie de l'arabe: systeme numérique de projection étude prosodique (une description linguistique en vue d'un traitement automatique.” Paris-VIII.

Awad, M. A. and M. M. Al-Umar (1988). “The Relationship Between the Verb and the Time of Occurence in Classical Arabic (In Arabic).” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 5(2): 52-89.

Awad, M. (1990). “Gender and Number Agreement in Standard Arabic.” Colorado Research in Linguistics 2: 1-6.

Awwad, M. A. (1983). “Topic-comment and acceptability constraints on embedded structures in modern standard Arabic.” Studia Linguistica 37(2): 175-92.

Awwad, M. A. (1987). “Free and bound pronouns as verbs in rural Palestinian colloquial Arabic.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 108-18.

Awwad, M. (1990). “Equivalence and translatability of English and Arabic Idioms.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics (PSCL) 26(1990): 57-67.

Ayalon, A. (1989). “Dimuqratiyya, hurriyya, jumhuriyya: The Modernization of the Arabic Political Vocabulary.” Asian and African Studies 23(1): 23-42.

Ayoub, G. and G. Bohas (1981). “Arab Grammarians, the Noun Phrase, and Good Sense.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 267-284.

Ayoub, G. (1990). De ce qui 'ne se dit pas' dans le Livre de Sibawayhi: La Notion de tamtil. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 1-15.

Ayoub, G. (1991). “La Nominalite du nom ou: La Question du tanwin.” Arabica: Journal of Arabic and Islamic Studies 38(2): 153-213.

Azer, H. A. (1985). “The expression of negation in Egyptian colloquial Arabic (ECA).” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 15-18.



Aziz, Y. Y. (1983). “Transliteration of English proper nouns into Arabic.” Meta 28(1): 70-84.

Aziz, Y. Y. (1985). “Modes of Address in English-Arabic Translation.” Babel: International Journal of Translation 31(3): 144-146.

Aziz, Y. Y. (1988). “Theme-Rheme Organization and Paragraph Structure in Standard Arabic.” Word 39(2): 117-128.

Azzam, R. (1990). The Nature of Arabic Reading and Spelling Errors of Young Children: A Descriptive Study, Columbia University Teachers College.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:4042A

Baalbaki, R. (1981). Arab Grammatical Controversies and Extant Sources of the Second and Third Centuries A. H. Studia Arabica et Islamica. W. Al-Qadi. Beirut, American University of Beirut. xv: 1-26.

Baalbaki, R. (1983). “The Relation between nahw and balagha: A Comparative Study of the Methods of Sibawayhi and Gurgani.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 11: 7-23.

Baalbaki, R. (1985). “The treatment of qira’at by the second and third century grammarians.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 11-32.

Baalbaki, R. (1986). “On the Meaning of the Waw al-ma‘iyya Construction.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 7-18.

Baalbaki, R. (1990). I‘rab and Bina' from Linguistic Reality to Grammatical Theory. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 17-33.

Bahloul, M. (1993). The Copula in Modern Standard Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 209-230.

Bahloul, M. and H. Wayne (1993). Agreement Asymetries in Arabic. The Eleventh West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics, Jonathan Mead.

Bahloul, R. (1994). Inflectional Morphology, Negation and the Clausal Structure in Tunisian Arabic, Cornell University.

Bahloul, M. (1994). The Syntax and Semantics of Taxis, Aspect, Tense and Modality in Standard Arabic, Cornell University.

Bahumaid, S. A. (1990). Lexical Interference of English in Colloquial Aden Arabic, University of Exeter (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:1307A

Bakalla, M. H. (1979). “Sibawayhi's contribution to the study of Arabic phonetics.” Al-‘Arabiyya 12(1-2): 68-76.

Bakalla, M. H. (1981). “The Treament of Nasal Elements by Early Arab and Muslim Phoneticians.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 285-305.

Bakalla, M. H. (1983). Arabic Linguistics: An Introduction and Bibliography. London, Mansell.

Baker, M. (1987). “Review of methods used for coining new terms in Arabic.” Meta 32(2): 186-8.

Bakhit, B. E. F. (1985). “Iz opyta orientirovaniia lingvostranovedcheskogo slovaria na sudanskuiu auditoriiu.” Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom 3: 67-72.

Bakir, M. (1980). Aspects of Clause Structure in Arabic: A Study of Word Order in Literary Arabic. Bloomington, Indiana University Linguistics Club.Dissertation Abstracts International 40:5422A

Bakir, M. (1986). “Sex differences in the approximation to standard Arabic: a case study.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 3-9.

Bakir, M. J. (1988). “Notes on Subjacency as a Syntactic Constraint in Arabic and English.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 22: 73-96.



Bakir, M. J. (1990). Notes on Subjacency as a Syntactic Constraint in Arabic and English. Further Insights into Contrastive Analysis. J. Fisiak. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 329-355.

Baldi, S. (1988). “A First Ethnolinguistic Comparison of Arabic Loanwords Common to Hausa and Swahili.” Annali Ist. Univ. Orientale 48(4).

Baldi, S. (1989). On Semantics of Arabic Loan Words in Hausa. Proc. of International Symposium on Chadic Linguistics. Current Progress in Chadic Linguistics. Z. Frajzyngier. Philadelphia, Benjamins: 285-301.

Ball, M. J. (1982). “Aspects of the acquisition of non-native phonological contrasts.” Polyglot 4(fiche 1): 1-17.

Bani Yasin, R. and J. Owens (1984). “The Bduul Dialect of Jordan.” Anthropological Linguistics 26(2): 202-232.

Bani Yasin, R. and J. Owens (1987). “The Phonology of a Northern Jordanian Arabic Dialect.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft 137(2): 297-331.

Bar-Lev, Z. (1982). “The logic of interdigitation.” Papers in Linguistics 15(1-4): 77-86.

Bar-Lev, Z. (1986). “Discourse theory and “contrastive rhetoric”.” Discourse Processes 9(2): 235-46.

Barbot, M. (1981). Evolution de l'arabe contemporain, I: Bibliographie d'arabe moderne et du Levant; Introduction au parler de Damas; II: LesSons du parler de Damas. Paris, Maisonneuve.

Barbot, M. (1983). Reflexions sur les reformes modernes de l'arabe litteral. Language Reform: History and Future. I. Fodor and C. Hagege. Hamburg, Buske: 127-154.

Barbot, M. (1984). L'Interrogation en arabe. Ling. Palatina Colloquia II. L'Interrogation: Actes du Colloque tenu les 19 et 20 decembre 1983 par le departement de linguistique de l'Universite de Paris-Sorbonne. P. Valentin. Paris, PU Paris-Sorbonne: 197-208.

Barcelo, C. (1990). “?Galgos o podencos? Sobre la supuesta berberizacion del pais valenciano en los siglos VIII y IX.” Al- Qantara: Revista de Estudios Arabes 11(2): 429-460.

Bardiner, D. B. (1979). “The Semantics of Russian Verbal Suffixes: A First Look.” Slavic and East European Journal 23(3): 381-394.

Barkho, L. Y. (1990). “Implications of Weather-Related Language: Contrasts between Arabic and English.” Journal of Pragmatics: An Interdisciplinary Bi-monthly of Language Studies 14(3): 471-476.

Bashir, S. M. (1982). A Functional Approach to Arabic Relative Clauses with Implications for Foreign Language Teaching, Columbia University Teachers College.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:1526A

Bastide, M. (1980). “Phonological interference between Arabic and French, as testified to by North African authors writing in French.” Le Francais dans le Monde 20(156): 26-9.

Bastide, M. (1980). “Le Temoignage des ecrivains maghrebins de langue francaise sur les interferences phonologiques du francais et de l'arabe.” Le Francais dans le Monde 156: 26-29.

Beaumont, J.-C. (1987). “Borrowing in Moroccan Arabic: Sociolinguistic factors of integration (L’ Emprunt en arabe marocain: facteurs sociolinguistiques d’integration).” McGill Working Papers in Linguistics 4(2): 53-88.

Bechtold, J. I. (1990). Memory and Comprehension of Inferences in Complex Sentences: A Comparison of English, Spanish, Chinese and Arabic, Kansas State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:5610B

Beesley, K., T. Buckwalter, et al. (1989). “Two-level finite state analysis of Arabic morphology.” CAM PROC 1 session 2a.3: 1-10.

Beesley, K. R. (1991). Computer Analysis of Arabic Morphology: A Two-Level Approach with Detours. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 155-172.



Beeston, A. F. L. (1981). “Some Notes on Classical Arabic Syntax.” Journal of Semitic Studies 26(1981 Spring): 21-30.

Beeston, A. F. L. (1981). “A Medieval 'Otherwise' Idiom.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 69-70.

Beeston, A. F. L. (1985). “Two Bi’r inscriptions reexamined.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 48(1): 42-52.

Beeston, A. F. L. (1989). “A Matter of Length, Unambiguous Examples of Short and Long Vowel Sounds in Classical Arabic.” Journal of Semitic Studies 34(2): 347-354.

Beeston , A. F. L. (1984). Sabaic Grammar. Manchester:, University of Manchester.

Behnstedt, P. (1981). “Weitere koptische Lehnworter im Agyptisch-Arabischen.” Die Welt des Orients: Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes 12: 81-98.

Behnstedt, P. and M. Woidich (1982). “Die egyptischen Oasen: Eine dialektologischer Vorbericht.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 8: 39-71.

Behnstedt, P. (1982). “Iz-zarga.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 7: 74-75.

Behnstedt, P. and M. Woidich (1985). Die Agyptisch-arabischen Dialekte. Wiesbaden, Reichert.

Behnstedt, P. (1987). “Remarks on the dialects from the Sacdah [North Yemen] region (Anmerkungen zu den dialekten der Gegend von Sacdah (Nord-Jemen)).” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 93-107.

Behnstedt, P. (1988). “Lexikalisches aus dem Jemen.” Die Welt des Orients: Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes 19: 142-155.

Behnstedt, P. and M. Woidich (1988). Die ägyptisch-arabischen Dialekte: Band 3, Texte: II. Niltaldialekte, III. Oasendialekte. Wiesbaden, Reichert.Egypt, dialect geography, texts

Behnstedt, P. (1989). “Christlich-Aleppinische Texte.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 20: 43-96.

Behnstedt, P. (1991). “Noch einmal zum Problem der Personalpronomina henne (3. Pl.), - kon (2. Pl.) und -hon (3. Pl.) in den syrisch-libanesischen Dialekten.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft 141: 235-252.

Behnstedt , P. (1987). “On the elative form afaclal in Aleppo Arabic (Zur Elativform afaclal im Aleppinischen).” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 92-3.

Beker, D. (1981). “Nivim u-fitgamim 'arviyim be-hashva'ot milim be-yemei ha-beinayim.” Leshonenu La'Am: Kuntresim 'Amamiyyim le-'Inyane Lashon/Popular Journal of Language 32: 35-46.

Belazi, H. M. (1992). Multilingualism in Tunisia and French/Arabic Code switching among Educated Tunisian Bilinguals. Ithaca, Cornell University.

Belkaid, Y. (1984). “The Vowels of Modern Literary Arabic-A Spectrographic Analysis.” Travaux de l'Institut de Phonetique de Strasbourg 16: 217-240.

Bellamy, J. (1985). “A New Reading of the Namarah Inscription (Arabic in Nabataean Script).” Journal of the American Oriental Society 105(1): 31-51.

Bellamy, J. A. (1987). “Arabic names in the Chanson de Roland: Saracen Gods, Frankish swords, Roland’s horse, and the Olifant.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 107(2): 267-77.

Bellamy, J. A. (1988). “Two Pre-Islamic Arabic Inscriptions Revised: Jabal Ramm and Umm al-Jimal.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 108(3): 369-378.

Bellamy, J. A. (1989). The Arabic Alphabet. The Origins of Writing. W. M. Senner and K. N. Schoville. Lincoln, University of Nebraska



Press: 91-102.

Bellman, D. (1983). Remarks about notion-problems of the dialectics between the national and the international and about the actual understanding of literature by the Arab Baath. Fourth International Conference on the Theoretical Problems of Asian and African Literatures, Bratislava, Literary Institute of the Slovak Academy of Sciences.

Belnap, R. K. (1987). “Who's Taking Arabic and What on Earth For? A Survey of Students in Arabic Language Programs.” Al-‘Arabiyya 20(1-2): 29-42.

Belnap, R. K. (1987). Complementation in Modern Standard Arabic and Givón's implicational hierarchical scales. Penn Review of Linguistics, Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania.

Belnap, R. K. (1991). Grammatical Agreement Variation in Cairene Arabic, University of Pennsylvania.

Belnap, R. K. and O. Shabaneh (1992). Variable Agreement with Nonhuman Controllers in Classical and Modern Standard Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Phildelphia, John Benjamins: 245-262.

Belnap, R. K. (1993). The Meaning of Deflected/Strict Agreement Variation in Cairene Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 97-118.

Belnap, K. and J. Gee (1994). Classical Arabic in Contact: The transition to near categorical agreement patterns. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 121-149.

Benabdellah, A. (1981). Problemes d'arabisation de la science et coordination des termes scientifiques. Internat. Symposium, Moscow, 27-30 Nov., 1979. Theoretical and Methodological Problems of Terminology/Problemes theoriques et methodologiques de terminologie/Teoreticheskie i metodologicheskie voprosy terminologii. M. Krommer-Benz. Munich, Saur: 399-411.

Benabdi, L. C. (1986). “Lexical expansion in the Maghrib: the functional linguistic corpus.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 61: 65-78.

Bendelac, A. (1988). “Humor and affectivity in Jacquetia, the Judeo-Spanish language of Northern Morocco.” Humor 1(2): 177-186.

Bender, M. L. (1983). “Color term encoding in a special lexical domain: Sudanese Arabic skin colors.” Anthropological Linguistics 25(1): 19-27.

Benhallam, A. (1978). Geminates: A New Approach. Papers of the 1978 Mid-America Linguistics Conference at Oklahoma. R. E. Cooley, M. R. Barnes and J. A. Dunn. Norman, Dept. of communication, University of Oklahoma: 212-221.

Benhallam, A. (1979). “MIT Phonology and Arabic.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 15: 30-41.

Benhallam, A. (1980). Syllable Structure and Rule Type in Arabic, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:2583-4A

Benhallam, A. (1980). Constraints on Syllables in Arabic. Lincoln: Area Studies Committee in Linguistics. R. S. Haller. Lincoln, University of Nebraska: 344-54.

Benjamin, H. (1989). “Middle Arabic: proposals for new terminology.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2, 1989): 19-36.

Benmamoun, E. (1991). Causatives in Moroccan Arabic. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic LInguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 173-195.

Benmamoun, E. (1991). Negation and Verb Movement. Proceedings of NELS 21, GLSA, University of Massachusetts at Amherst.

Benmamoun, E. (1992). Structural Conditions on Agreement. Proceedings of NELS 22, GLSA, University of Massachusetts, Amherst.

Benmamoun, E. (1992). Inflectional Morphology: Problems of Projection, Representation and Derivation, University of So. California.

Benmamoun, E. (1992). Null Pronominals in the Context of NPs and QP. Proceedings of WCCFL 1992.



Bentahila, A. (1983). “Motivations for code-switching among Arabic-French bilinguals in Morocco.” Language and Communication 3(3): 233-43.

Bentahila, A. and E. E. Davies (1983). “The syntax of Arabic-French code switching.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 59(4): 301-30.

Bentahila, A. (1983). Language attitudes among Arabic-French bilinguals in Morocco. Clevedon, Bank House.

Bentahila, A. and E. E. Davies (1991). “Standards for Arabic: One, Two or Many?” Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics 17(1): 69-88.

Berge, H. J. (1981). “Mutations vocaliques dans les dialectes hispano-arabes.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(1981 June-Sept.): 362-368.

Bergman, E. M. (1992). What the Old Ones Said: The Syntax of the Moroccan Arabic Proverb, The University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 53:3516A

Bergman, E., Ed. (1993). Keeping it in the Family: Gender and Conflict in Moroccan Arabic Proverbs. Gender and Society. New York, Columbia University Press.

Bergman, E. M. (1993). What the Old Ones Said: The Syntax of the Moroccan Arabic Proverb, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International vl. 53

Bergstrasser, G. (1928). Introduction to the Semitic Languages. Winona Lake, Indiana, Eisenbrauns.

Bernal, M. (1987). “On the Transmission of the Alphabet to the Aegean Before 1400 B.C.” Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research 267(Aug): 1-19.

Bernards, M. P. L. M. (1990). The Basrian Grammarian 'Abu 'Umar al-Garmi: His Position between Sibawayhi and Mubarrad. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 35-47.

Bertel's, A. E. (1982). “Subdivisions of the Lexicon, Semantic Fields and Thematic Groups of Words.” Voprosy yazykonznaniya 31(4): 52-63.

Bertrand, C. (1990). “Four Linguistic Trumps.” Le Francais dans le Monde 29(supplement 14): 46-48.

Besner, D., S. Daniels, et al. (1982). “Ideogram Reading and Right Hemisphere Language.” The British Journal of Psychology 73(1): 21-28.

Besner, D., D. Snow, et al. (1986). “Logographic reading: is the right hemisphere special?” Canadian Journal of Psychology 40(1): 45-53.

Bezirgan, N. A. (1979). “Some logical rules in al-Kitab.” Al-‘Arabiyya 12(1-2): 77-82.

Biesterfeldt, H.-H. (1990). Ibn Farigun's Chapter on Arabic Grammar in His Compendium of the Sciences. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 49-56.

Biletskii, A. O. (1981). “On words of Eastern origin in Western language.” Movoznavstvo 15(5(89)): 47-51.

Billiez, J. (1985). “Les jeunes issus de l’immigration algerienne et espagnole a grenoble: quelques aspects sociolinguistiques.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 54: 41-56.

Blanc, H. (1971). Arabic. Current Trends in Linguistics, VII: Linguistics in Sub-Saharan Africa. T. A. Sebeok and others. The Hague, Mouton. VII: 501-509.

Blanc, H. (1981). Egyptian Arabic in the Seventeenth Century: Notes on the Judeo-Arabic Passages of Darxe No'am (Venice, 1697). Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by HisGoitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His Students, Colleagues, and Friends. S. Morag. Jerusalem, Magnes Press: 185-202.



Blau, J. (1981). “The State of Research in the Field of the Linguistic Study of Middle Arabic.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(1981 June-Sept.): 187-203.

Blau, J. (1981). The Emergence and Linguistic Background of Judeo-Arabic: A Study of the Origins of Middle Arabic. Leiden, Brill.

Blau, J. (1982). “Remarks on the development of some pronominal suffixes in Hebrew.” Hebrew Annual Review 6: 61-7.

Blau, J. (1982). “Some Ugaritic, Hebrew, and Arabic Parallels.” Journal of Northwest Semitic Languages (JNWSL) 10: 5-10.

Blau, J. (1983). “Vestiges of tanwin -un and the case ending -u as attested in Yemenite Judeo-Arabic texts from the seventeenth century.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 46(3): 528-31.

Blau, J. and S. Hopkins (1984). “On early Judaeo-Arabic orthography.” Journal of Arabic Lingusitics 12: 9-27.

Blau, J. (1985). “Notes on the use of different registers of Judeo-Arabic by one author.” Hebrew Annual Review 9: 75-8.

Blau, J. (1988). Studies in Middle Arabic and Its Judaeo-Arabic Variety. Jerusalem, Magnes Press, Hebrew Univ.

Blau, J. (1990). “The Academy of the Hebrew Language and the Arabic Language Academies.” Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects 54(2-4): 269-278.

Blau, J. (1991). Kavim Milonyim Ofyaniyim HaMeshutafim LaAravit HaYehudit VeLaLehagim HaAraviyim HaHadashim. Mehkarim BaSafrut Am Yisrael UVeTarbut Teyman - Sefer HaYovel LeProfessor Yehuda Ratzaby. J. Dishon and E. Hazan. Ramat-Gan, Bar-IIan UP: 11-17.

Bloch, A. (1980). “Direct and Indirect Relative Clauses.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 8-34.

Bloch, A. A. (1990). “Damir al-sa'n.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21: 30-39.

Blohm, D. (1981). “Zur Funktion des Partizip Aktiv im modernen Hocharabisch.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 34: 143-151.

Blohm, D. (1989). “Terminativ-2-Verben im Arabischen.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 42(6).

Blohm, D. (1989). “Arabic Verbs of Horizontal Movement: The Action Type and Semantics of Verb Forms.” Linguistische Studien 189: 1-16.

Blohm, D. (1991). “Some Remarks on Writing a Grammar of Modern Standard Arabic.” Folia Orientalia 28: 89-98.

Blommaert, J. M. E. (1985). “The semantics of Bantu colour terms.” Grazer Linguistische Studies 24: 63-76.

Bobzin, H. (1980). “Zur Haufigkeit von Verben im Neuhocharabischen.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 35-69.

Bobzin, H. (1981). “Zum Begriff der 'Vlenz' des Verbums in der Arabischen Nationalgrammatik.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 329-344.

Bobzin, H. (1981). “Zur Deutung von fa-nadaha min tahtiha.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 70-72.

Bobzin, H. (1982). “yi'anina.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 7: 75-76.

Bobzin, H. (1982). “Eine mogliche Parallele zu fa-'ummuhu hawiyatun (Sure 101, 9).” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 9: 79-80.

Bobzin, H. (1985). “Notes on the importance of variant readings and grammar in the Tafsir al-Galalayn.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 33-44.

Bobzin, H. and K. Versteegh, Eds. (1985). Studies in the history of Arabic grammar: proceedings of the first symposium on the history of Arabic grammar. Journal of Arabic Linguistics.



Bobzin, H. (1990). Guillaume Postel (1510-1581) und die Terminologie der arabischen Nationalgrammatik. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 57-71.

Boff, M.-C. (1983). “A Contribution to the Experimental Study of Back Consonants in Classical Arabic (Moroccan Speakers).” Travaux de l'Institut de Phonetique de Strasbourg 15: 1-363.

Bohas, G. (1981). “Quelques Aspects de l'Argumentation et de l'Explication chez les Grammairiens Arabes.” Arabica 28(2-3): 204-221.

Bohas, G. (1985). “Explanation in Arab phonology.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 45-52.

Bohas, G. (1986). “Accent and deletion of e in the Damascus Dialect of Arabic (Accentuation et effacement de e dans le parler de damas).” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 39-60.

Bohrer, W. G. (1988). “The Well-Formedness Condition: Bounded versus Unbounded Association.” Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL) 5: 36-46.

Bokamba, E. G. (1984). “Language in African Culture and Society.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 14(2).

Boldyrev, A. H. (1984). ““The Seven Repeated Rhymes” [From the history of one term of Arabic-Persian versification].” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 33(3): 44-7.

Bolozky, S. S., George N. (1983). “On Active and Non-Active Causativizable Verbs in Arabic and Hebrew.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 10: 71-79.

Bolozky, S. and A. F. Haydar (1986). “Colloquial gender neutralization in the numeral systems of modern Hebrew and Lebanese Arabic.” Al-’Arabiyya 19(1-2): 19-28.

Bonfante, G. (1986). “The continuity of Latin in Sicily (La continuita del latino in Sicilia).” Mediterranean Language Review 2: 47-9.

Bonnard, H. (1985). “Francophonie maghrebine.” L' Information Grammaticale 26: 20-22.

Bonnot, J.-F. (1979). “Experimental Study of Some Aspects of Gemination and Emphasis in Arabic.” Travaux de l'Institut de Phonetuque de Strasbourg 11: 109-118.

Borer , H. and L. Tuller (1985). “Nominative/agreement complementarity and VSO order in standard Arabic.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 27-32.

Borg, A. J. (1980). “An aspectual distinction in verbs and nouns in Maltese.” Archivum Linguisticum: A Review of Comparative Philology and General Linguistics 11: 107-17.

Borg, A. J. (1981). A Study of Aspect in Maltese. A Study of Aspect in Maltese, Karoma.

Borg, A. J., B. Comrie, et al. (1984). Object diffuseness in Maltese. Objects: Towards a Theory of Grammatical Relations. London, Academic Press: 109-26.

Borg, A. (1984). “Kormakiti Arabic: phonological notes and texts.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 13: 68-85.

Bosworth, C. E. (1989). “A Note on ta'arrub in Early Islam.” Journal of Semitic Studies 34(2): 355-362.

Bouacha, A.-A. (1984). “Toward a local comprehension of the notion of second language.” Le Francais dans le Monde 24(189): 33-37.

Bouamrane, A. (1986). Aspects of the Sociolinguistic Situation in Algeria, University of Aberdeen (UK).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:3407A

Boucherit, A. (1987). “Arabic-French alternative discourse in Algiers (Discours alternatif arabe-francais a Alger).” La Linguistique 23(2): 117-29.

Boucherit, A. (1991). “Convergence et resistance des hommes et des langues.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 87: 55-70.



Boucherit, A. (1992). “Quelques remarques a propos du cheminement des emprunts en arabe algerien.” L' Information Grammaticale 54: 56-58.

Bouhadiba, F. A. N. (1988). Aspects of Algerian Arabic Verb Phonology and Morphology, University of Reading (UK).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:3700A

Boukous, A. (1979). “La Situation linguistique au Maroc: Competition symbolique et acculturation.” Revue Litteraire Mensuelle 602-603: 5-21.

Bovingdon, R. (1989). “The Mould of a New Environment: THe Maltese Language in Australia.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 110-115.

Boysson-Bardies, B. d., P. Halle, et al. (1989). “A Crosslinguistic Investigation of Vowel Formants in Babbling.” Journal of Child Language 16(1): 1-17.

Brahimi, B. (1987). “Benefits and Drawbacks of Arabization.” Le Francais dans le Monde 27(213): 39-41.

Brame, M. K. (1983). “Bound anaphora is not a relation between NPs: evidence for local word grammar (without trees).” Linguistic Analysis 11(2): 139-66.

Brame, M. (1985). “Recursive syntax of Arabic speech.” Workshop Papers Kuwait 1.

Bramon, D. (1987). “Article Agglutination and Deglutination in Castilian and Catalan Arabisms.” Vox Romanica 46: 138-179.

Branca, P. (1990). “Basic Units of the Arabic Speech at the Graphic-Semantic Interface.” Aevum-Rassegna di Scienze Storiche Linguitiche e Filologiche 64(3): 489-501.

Braun, F. (1985). Umgekehrte Anrede im Arabischen. Studia Linguistica Diachronica et Synchronica Werner Winter Sexagenario Anno MCMLXXXIII Gratis Animis ab Eius Collegis, Amicis Discipulisque Oblata. U. Pieper and G. Stickel. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 81-92.

Breeze, A. (1991). “Old English ealfara, 'Pack-Horse': A Spanish-Arabic Loanword.” Notes and Queries 38: 15-17.

Bresova, J. (1991). “Arabske ekvivalenty ceskych slovotvornych prostredku vyjadrovani voluntativni modality.” Sbornik Praci Filosoficke Fakulty Brnenske University: Rada Jazykovedna - A 39: 93-97.

Briceno Jauregui, M. (1988). “The Genesis of Spanish.” Glotta 3(2): 8-12.

Briffa, C. (1989). “White Dipping Sails.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20: 62-70.

Britti, A. (1980). “A history of right dislocation in certain Levantine Arabic dialects.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 121-39.

Broeder, P. and G. Extra (1991). “Acquisition of Kinship Reference: A Study on Word-Formation Processes of Adult Language Learners.” International Journal of Applied Linguistics 1(2): 209-227.

Broeder, P. (1992). “Possession in a New Language.” Applied Linguistics 13(1): 100-118.

Broselow, E. (1979). “Cairene Arabic Syllable Structure.” Linguistic Analysis 5(4): 345-382.

Broselow, E. (1980). “Syllable structure in two Arabic dialects.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 13-24.

Broselow, E. (1982). “On predicting the interaction of stress and epenthesis.” Glossa: An International Journal of Linguistics 16(2): 115-32.

Broselow, E. (1983). A lexical treatment of Cairene Arabic object clitics. Current Approaches to African Linguistics. Dordrecht, Foris. I: 287-97.

Broselow, E. (1983). Nonobvious Transfer: On Predicting Epenthesis Errors. Language Transfer in Language Learning. S. M. Gass and L. Selinker. Rowley, Newbury House: 269-280.



Broselow, E. (1984). Ahmaric, automatic spreading, and the obligatory contour principle, University of New York, Stony Brood.

Broselow, E. and J. McCarthy (1984). “A theory of internal reduplication.” Linguistic Review 3(1): 25-88.

Broselow, E. (1988). “An investigation of transfer in second language phonology.” Studies in Descriptive Linguistics 17: 77-93.

Broselow, E. (1988). Prosodic Phonology and the Acquisition of a Second Language. Linguistic Theory in Second Language Acquisition. S. Flynn and W. O'Neil. Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic: 295-308.

Broselow, E., M. Eid, et al., Eds. (1992). Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Broselow, E. (1992). Parametric Variation in Arabic Dialect Phonology. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 7-46.

Broselow, E. (1992). Transfer and Universals in Second Language Epenthesis. Language Transfer in Language Learning. S. M. Gass and L. Selinker. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 71-86.

Bruhn, T. C. (1986). A Study of the Relationship among Language, Culture and Cognition, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:1451A

Brusset, J. and A. Saroh (1987). Création d'une base de données lexicale de l'arabe écrit: Utilisation pour un systeme morpho-syntaxique, Université de Tunis, Centre d'Etudes et de Recherches Economiques et Sociales.

Brustad, K. E. (1992). The Comparative Syntax of Four Arabic Dialects: An Investigation of Selected Topics, Harvard University.DAI No. DA9211770

Bubenik, V. (1979). “Thematization and passivization in Arabic.” Lingua 49(4): 295-313.

Bubenik, V. (1990). Structural Influence of Arabic and Persian on the North-Western Indo-Aryan Languages. Papers from the Fourteenth Annual Meeting of the Atlantic Provinces Linguistic Association. J. Black. St. John's, Newfoundland.

Buckwalter, T. A. (1988). “A Brief Note on OCP and Arabic Texts.” Literary and Linguistic Computing: Journal of the Association for Literary and Linguistic Computing 3(4): 271-272.

Budagov, V. B. (1986). “Linguistic terms of Arabic origin in literary-artistic azerbaijani [The nineteenth and the beginning of the twentieth centuries] (Azerbajdahaned ebi-bedii dilinde ereb mensheli lingvistik terminler (XIX esr-XX esrin evvelleri)).” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyki iskusstov 3: 92-8.

Bunis, D. M. (1983). “Some Problems in Judezmo Linguistics.” Mediterranean Language Review 1: 103-138.

Buridant, C. (1980). “Problems of Lexical Borrowing in medieval Latin.” Cahiers de l’Institut de Linguistique de Louvain 6(1-2): 37-67.

Burton, J. (1988). “Linguistic Errors in the Qur'an.” Journal of Semitic Studies 33(2): 181-196.

Butcher, A. and K. Ahmad (1987). “Some Acoustic and Aerodynamic Characteristics of Pharyngeal Consonants in Iraqi Arabic.” Phonetica 44(3): 156-172.

Bynon, J. (1979). “The Baby Talk Register and Diachrony: The Evidence from Arabic and Berber.” International Conference on Historical Linguistics.

Cabanelas Rodriguez, D. (1981). Estado linguistico de al-Andalus en torno al siglo XI. Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 25-43.

Cachia, P. (1988). “From Sound to Echo in Late Badi Literature (Pre-Modern Arabic Literature).” Journal of the American Oriental Society 108(2): 219-225.

Cachia, P. (1989). “The Development of a Modern Prose Style in Arabic Literature.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 52(1): 65-76.



Cadora, F. J. (1966). “The Concept of Compatibility in the Study of Language Varieties.” Word 22(1, 2, & 3): 310-317.

Cadora, F. J. (1979). Interdialectical Lexical Compatibility in Arabic: An Analytical Study of the Lexical Relationships among the Major Syro-Lebanese Varieties. Leiden, Brill.

Cadora, F. J. (1989). “Linguistic Change and the Bedouin-Sedentary Dichotomy in Old Arabic Dialects.” Anthropological Linguistics 31(3&4): 264-284.

Cadora, F. J. (1992). Bedouin, Village, and Urban Arabic: An Ecolinguistic Study. Leiden, E.J. Brill.

Calder, N. (1988). “Hinth, birr, tabarrur, tahannuth: An Inquiry into the Arabic Vocabulary of Vows.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 51(2): 214-239.

Calder, N. (1991). “The Qurra' and the Arabic Lexicographical Tradition.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 36(2): 297-307.

Call, M. E. (1985). “Auditory Short-Term Memory, Listening Comprehension, and the Input Hypothesis.” TESOL Quarterly 19(4): 765-781.

Calvet, L.-J. (1989). “Ouatreres or vecees? Borrowing or Etymology?” Le Francais dans le Monde 29(222): 43-44.

Campbell, R. B. (1981). Towards a Dictionary of Contemporary Arab Writers, Arab Society 1978-79: Reflections and Realities. Beirut: Dar el-Mashreq.

Cantarino, V. (1994). From Spoken to Written Language and Back: Some cultural considerations on Hispano-Arabic phonetics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 25-35.

Card, E. A. (1983). A Phonetic and Phonological Study of Arabic Emphasis, Cornell University.

Cardona, G. R. and A. V. Rossi (1981). L'arabo oggi: Teoria e prassi della sua descrizione linguistica. Il mondo islamico tra interazione e acculturazione. A. Bausani and B. Scarcia Amoretti. Roma, Istituto di Studi Islamici. viii: 21-36.

Cardona, G. R. (1981). Schede sulla diffusione dell'arabo nell'Africa subsahariana. Il mondo islamico tra interazione e acculturazione. A. Bausani and B. Scarcia Amoretti. Roma, Istituto di Studi Islamici. viii: 67-76.

Carter, M. G. (1981). “The use of proper names as a testing device in Sibawayhi’s Kitab.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 345-56.

Carter, M. G., Ed. (1981). Arab Linguistics: An Introductory Classical Text with Translation and Notes. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Carter, M. G. (1985). “When Did the Arabic Word “Nahw” First Come to Denote Grammar?” Language and Communication: An Interdisciplinary Journal 5(4): 265-272.

Carter, M. G. (1985). “The Term Sabab in Arabic Grammar.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 53-66.

Carter, M. G. (1990). Qadi, Qadi, Qad: Which Is the Odd Man Out?. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 73-90.

Carter, M. G. and K. Versteegh (1990). Studies in the History of Arabic Grammer II. Amsterdam, John Benjamins Publishing Company.

Cassar-Pullicino, J. (1986). “Some Parallels between Maltese and Arabic Folklore.” Acta Ethnographica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 34(1-4): 143-175.

Cassels, D. A. (1986). “Near-rhyme and its occurrence in the Qur’an.” Journal of Semitic Studies 28(2): 303-10.

Cassola, A. (1989). “Anthony Burgess's MF: The Mediterranean BAckground to a Caribbean Island.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 27-33.

Cassola, A. (1989). “Voci maltesi obsolete e rare di origine italiana nelle Regole per la lingua maltese.” Archivio Glottologico Italiano 74(2): 201-204.



Caton, S. C. (1991). “Diglossia in North Yemen: A Case of Competing Linguistic Communities.” Southwest Journal of Linguistics 10(1): 143-159.

Caubet, D. (1983). “Quantification, Negation, Interrogation: less emplois de la particule si en arabe marocain.” Arabica XXX(3): 227-245.

Caubet, D. (1984). A le recherche d'un invariant: les emplois de la particule si en arabe marocain. Operations de determination II. Paris, University of Paris: 33-56.

Caubet, D. (1985). “Language bebe en marocain.” Communication faite au G.L.E.C.S. Avril 85: 73-106.

Caubet, D. (1985-1986). “Systemes aspecto-temporels en arabe maghrebin.” MAS-GELLAS 1985-86: 97-127.

Caubet, D. (1986). Les deux parfaits en arabe marocain. Aspects, Modalite: Progblemes de Categorisation Grammaticale. Paris, University of Paris. 1028: 71-102.

Caubet, D. (1987). Passif et Transitivite: Etude comparative de l'anglais et de l'arabe marocain. La Transitivite, Universite de Saint-Etienne: 109-126.

Caubet, D. (1989). The three values of the active participles in Moroccan Arabic. Proceedings of the 1989 International Conference on Europe and the Middle East, University of Durham.

Caubet, D. (1991). Modalite et Modalisation: Rapport. Modalisations en Langue Etrangere. C. Russier, H. Stoffel and D. Veornique, Publcations d l'Universite de Provence: 9-15.

Caubet, D. (1991). The active participle as a means to renew the aspectual system: a comparative study in several dialects of Arabic. Semitic Studies in Honor of Wolf Leslau. A. Kaye: 209-224.

Caubet, D. (1992). “Deixis, aspect et modalite: les particules ha- et ra en arabe Marocain.” La Deixis Juin 1990: 139-149.

Caubet, D. (1992). “Pour une approche transctegorielle: les emplois de la particule gae en arabe marocain.” La Theorie d'Antoine Culioli, Ouvertures et incidences: 145-159.

Caubet, D. (1993). L'arabe Marocain.

Caubet-Caron, D. (1992). Deixis, aspect et modalite: Les Particules 'ha' et 'ra' en arabe morocain. Colloque en Sorbonne. La Deixis. M.-A. Morel and L. Danon-Boileau. Paris, PU de France. 8-9: 139-149.

Chahristan, K. (1991). Aspects of Phrases and Clauses in Syrian within the Framework of Head-Driven Phrase Structure Grammar, University College of North Wales (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 53:3509A

Charette, M. (1991). Conditions on Phonological Government. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Chemski, Z. B. (1985). “The Native Language Up Against the Outside: The Case of North African Children.” Mediterranean Peoples 33(Oct-Dec): 127-138.

Chetverukhin, A. S. (1990). “The Egyptian realization of two Afro-Asian deictic-relative morphemes.” Voprosy Yazykoznaniya 39(2): 91-101.

Chiadmi, D., M. Najim, et al. (1989). “On lexical stress in Arabic, LEESA, Faculté des Sciences, Rabat, Morocco.” Journal Acoustique 2(2): 171-76.

Chipman, H. H. and M. I. Di Francavilla (1989). “His or Hers? How Young English and Algerian Arabic-Speaking Children Understand Third Person Possessive Pronouns in Object Positions.” Folia Linguistica 23(1-2): 157-180.

Cho, Y.-m. Y. (1989). “On the principle of similarity in consonantal assimilation.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 25(1): 14-26.



Choukroun, G. B. (1992). “Du comportement des parasynthemes en judeo-arabe de Fes.” La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Inernationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle 28(no. 1, 1992): 101-120.

Choumet, M. (1986). “Interrogeons le Coran a propos de la priere rituelle 'As-Slat.” Revue des Etudes Islamiques 54: 77-84.

Churchyard, H. (1993). Early Arabic siin and siin in Light of the Proto-Semitic Fricative-lateral Hypothesis. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 313-342.

Cifoletti, G. (1979). “The Word Fantasia in Mediterranean Languages.” Incontri Linguistici 5: 139-145.

Cifoletti, G. (1979). “Influssi Dell'italiano nei Dialetti Arabi Orientali.” Atti del Sodalizio Glottologico Milanese (ASGM) 21: 71-73.

Cifoletti, G. (1992). “Un esempio di applicazione della quarta regola di Trubeckoj.” Incontri Linguistici 15: 137-139.

Clark, M. A., A. Losoff, et al. (1981). “Gender Perception in Arabic and English.” Language Learning 31(1): 159-169.

Clarke, M. A., A. Losoff, et al. (1984). “Linguistic Relativity and Sex/Gender Studies: Epistemological and Methodological Consideration.” Language Learning 34(2): 47-67.

Cohen, D. (1981). “Historical and sociolinguistic observations on the Arab speech of Jews in the Maghreb.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 30: 91-105.

Cole, C. (1986). “The singuist.” The Linguist 25(1): 22-23.

Colomer, G. (1982). Lexique francais-arabe: Contenant le vocabulaire des mots les plus usuels employes dans la conversation courante au Maghreb: Precede de l'expose des regles elementaires de la grammaire. Niort, Ed. du Terroire.

Comrie, B. (1980). “The Sun Letters in Maltese: Between Morphophonemics and Phonetics.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 23-37.

Comrie, B. (1983). Syntactic-Morphological Discrepancies in Maltese Sentence Structure. Problems in Syntax. L. Tasmowski and D. Willems. New York, Ghent: Plenum: 3-28.

Comrie, B. (1986). The possessive predicate in North African vernacular Arabic. The Fergusonian Impact. 1: 197-210.

Comrie, B. (1986). “The Maltese Pharyngeal.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 39(2): 12-18.

Comrie, B. and M. Eid, Eds. (1991). Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics III. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Comrie, B. (1991). On the Importance of Arabic for General Linguistic Theory. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 3-30.

Comrie , B. (1982). “Syntactic-morphological discrepancies in Maltese sentence structure.” Communication and Cognition 15(3-4): 281-306.

Cook, V. J. (1975). “Strategies in the comprehension of relative clause.” Language and Speech 18(3): 204-212.

Cooke, M. (1983). “Ibn Khaldun and language:from linguistic habit to philological craft.” Journal of Asian and African Studies 18(3-4): 179-88.

Cooper, R. L. (1979). “The Acquisition of Complex English Structures by Adult Native Speakers of Arabic and Hebrew.” Language Learning 29(2): 255-275.

Corriente, F. (1980). “Notes on Hispano-Arabic Lexicology.” Vox Romanica 39: 183-210.

Corriente, F. (1980). “Notas de lexicologia hispanoarabe.” Vox Romanica: Annales Helvetici Explorandis Linguis Romanicis Destinati 39: 183-210.

Corriente, F. (1981). “Notas de lexicologia hispano-arabe.” Awraq (Madrid) 4: 5-30.



Corriente, F. (1983). “The Mozarabic-Hispano-Arabic series adalah, adaqal, adass, . . . and the Castilian preposition hasta.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie 99(1-2): 29-32.

Corriente, F. (1985). Apostillas de lexicografia hispano-arabe. Actas de las II Jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica (1980). Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 119-162.

Corriente, F. (1994). Current State of Research in the Field of Andalusi Arabic: Achievements and prospects. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 7-16.

Corvetto, I. L. (1982). “The Intonation of Syrian Arabic.” Lingua E Stile 17(3): 371-393.

Coulmas, F. (1989). Language Adaptation. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Cowan, W. (1981). “On the origin of -s- in Spanish hasta.” The Canadian Journal of Linguistics 26(2): 223-6.

Cowan , W. (1981). “Arabic grammatical terminology in Pedro de Alcala.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 357-63.

Craddock, J. R. (1988). “The Diphthong /ay/ - /ey/ in Toledan Mozarabic.” Vox Romanica 47: 175-179.

Crevatin, F. (1984). “'Scrittura sulla sabbia' in Somalia.” Incontri Linguistici 9: 167-176.

Cukor-Avila, P. (1988). “The Effect of Accent on Speech and Personality Judgements.” PALM 3(2): 1-20.

Cunningham, D. J. and S. A. Tel (1984). “The Independence/Interdependence of Knowledge in the Bilingual Memory.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 3.1: 1-17.

Cuq, J.-P. (1986). “L'Expression de l'hypothese: Enquete en milieu scolaire marocain.” Presence Francophone: Revue Internationale de Langue et de Litterature 28: 119-129.

Cuq, J.-P. (1988). “'Interference'?” Diagonales 8: 32-33.

Cuq, J.-P. (1991). “Exprimer l'hypothese en francais: Un Changement de perspective linguistique pour les eleves marocains.” L' Information Grammaticale 51: 47-49.

Daher, N. Y. (1983). “Goals, objectives, and testing in Arabic: where do we go from here?” Al-‘Arabiyya 16(1-2): 97-107.

Daher, N. Y. (1987). “Arabic sociolinguistics: state of the art.” Al-‘Arabiyya 20(1-2): 125-160.

Daher, N. Y. (1987). “Al-Jurani's 'Regents' and Today's Linguistic Analysis.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 4.2: 49-62.

Daher, N. Y. (1988). “What is happening to a Lebanese dialect in Cleveland, Ohio: language attrition in progress.” Al-‘Arabiyya 21(1-2): 3-18.

Daher, N. Y. (1992). A Lebanese Dialect in Cleveland: Language Attrition in Progress. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 25-35.

Dahiyat, E. (1988). “The Philistine Deity Dagon: The Semitic Origin and Two Possible Derivations.” Studia Anglica Posnaniensia 20: 213-216.

Dahl, O. and F. Talmoudi (1979). Qad and Laqad: Tense/Aspect and Pragmatics in Arabic. Fifth Scandinavian Conference of Linguistics, Frostavallen, Almqvist and Wiksell.

Dana, J. (1983). “Some Spelling Mistakes in Hebrew Compositions by Arabic-Speaking Non-Jews in Israel Today.” Jewish Language Review 3: 47-49.

Dana, J. (1988). “Recent Problems in Hebrew-Arabic and Arabic-Hebrew Lexicography.” A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects 52: 94-105.



Danchev, A. (1983). “Contrastive linguistics in Bulgaria.” Jyvaskla Cross-Language Studies 9: 39-63.

Danecki, J. (1990). Al-Mubarrad's Place in the History of Arabic Grammar. History and Historiography of Linguistics: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on the History of the Language Sciences. H.-J. Niederehe and K. Koerner. Amsterdam, BEnjamins. xxv: 135-146.

Danecki, J. (1990). The Phonetical Theory of Mubarrad. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 91-99.

Daoud, M. (1991). The Processing of EST Discourse: Arabic and French Native Speakers' Recognition of Rhetorical Relationships in Engineering Texts, University of California, Los Angeles.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:2905A

Darke, D. (1985). “Arabic: unifying factor of the Islamic world.” Language Monthly 25: 16-17.

Davies, H. T. (1981). Seventeenth-Century Egyptian Arabic: A Profile of the Colloquial Material in Yusuf al-Sirbini's Hazz al-Quhuf fi, University of California, Berkeley.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3135A

Davies, E. E. (1987). “A constrastive approach to the analysis of politeness formulas.” Applied Linguistics 8(1): 75-88.

Davies, E. E. and A. Bentahila (1989). “Familiar and Less Familiar Metaphors: An Analysis of Interpretations in Two Languages.” Language and Communication 9(1): 49-68.

Davis, S. (1984). “Some implication of onset-coda constraints for syllable phonology.” Papers form the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 20: 46-51.

Davis, L. M. (1984). “The pharyngeals in Hebrew: linguistic change in apparent time.” Folia Linguistics Historica 5(1): 25-32.

Davis, S. (1988). “Syllable onsets as a factor in stress rules.” Phonology 5: 1-19.

Davis, S. (1990). “An Argument for the Underspecification of [Coronal] in English.” Linguistic Inquiry 21(2): 301-306.

Davis, S. (1991). “On the phonological analysis of emphasis in two modern Arabic dialects.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 8.2: 1-20.

Davis, S. (1992). Pharyngealization in Palestinian Arabic: Implications for feature theory. West Coast Conference of Formal Linguistics 11.

Davis, S. (1993). Arabic Pharyngealization and Phonological Features. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 149-162.

Davison, A. (1980). “Peculiar Passives.” Language 56(1): 42-66.

De Bot, K. and R. Van Montfort (1988). “"Cue-Validity" in Dutch as a First and Second Language.” Interdisciplinair Tijdschrift voor Taal- & Tekstwetenschap 8(2): 111-120.

De Boysson-Bardies, B. (1982). “Do babies babble in their maternal language?” La Recherche 13(129): 102-4.

De Francis, J. (1984). “Digraphia.” Word 35(1): 59-66.

De Gorog, R. (1981). “The application of onomasiology to synonymy, word formation, and etymology.” Word 32(2): 99-108.

De Marco, B. (1988). “The Sounds of Change: Arabic Linguistic Influences in Sicily.” Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics: 94-101.

Decsy, G., Ed. (1986). List of the languages of the world in decreasing order of the speaker numbers with phyletic and geographic identificationa. Statistical Report on the Languages of the World as of 1985. Bloomington, IN, Eurolingua.

Deloche, G. and X. Seron (1985). “Syntactical Knowledge in a Case of Agrammatism: Evidence from Transcoding Roman and Arabic



Numerals.” Brain and Language 25(2): 234-245.

DeMarco, B. (1988). “The sounds of change: Arabic linguistic influences in Sicily.” Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics: 94-101.

Demidova, G. M. and O. I. Red'kin (1989). “Modification of Vocal Phonemes in Semitic Languages as a Result of Interaction of Vowels and Gutteral Consonants.” Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazkoznanie-literaturoveden 44(3(2)): 60-68.

DeMiller, A. L. (1988). “Syntax and semantics of the Form II Modern Standard Arabic verb.” Al-‘Arabiyya 21(1-2): 19-50.

Deprez, V. a. V., Marie-Therese (1992). “Une Structure predicative sans copule.” Revue Quebecoise de Linguistique 22(1): 11-44.

Derbal, M. and J. P. Tamine (1984). “French Acquisition by Adults in a Bilingual Environment.” Le Francais dans le Monde 24(189): 46-49.

Deulofeu, J. (1986). Sur quelques procedes de hierarchisation de l'information dans des recits d'apprenants marocains en milieu naturel: Pour une conception souple des rapports entre phenomenes de micro et de macro thematisation. Acquisition d'une langue etrangere: Perspectives et recherches. A. Giacomi and D. Veronique. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 262-283.

Deulofeu, J. and D. Veronique (1986). Genese des interlangues et etude du francais parle: A propos de l'acquisition du francais par des adultes marocains. Travaux, IV: Genese des langues et du langage. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 101-130.

Devenyi, K. (1990). “Incongruity in Coordination: The 177th Aya of Surat al-Baqara.” Act Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (AOASH) 44(3): 381-388.

Devenyi, K. (1990). On Farra's Linguistic Methods in His Work Ma‘ani al-Qur'an. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 101-110.

Diab, T. (1990). Pedagogical Lexicography: A Case Study of Arab Nurses as Dictionary Users. Tubingen, Niemeyer.

Diaz Garcia, A. (1981). Estudio filologico de una carta en arabe dialectal hispanico. Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 613-617.

Dichy, J. (1990). Grammatologie de l'arabe, I: Les Sens du mot harf ou le labyrinthe d'une evidence. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. ofArabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 111-128.

Dickins, J. (1989). Extended Axiomatic Functionalism: A Contrastive Assessment with Application to Aspects of Arabic, Heriot-Watt University (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 51:3721A

Diem, W. (1971). “Uber eine Einfuhrung in die Europaische Sprachwissenschaft auf Arabisch.” Die Welt des Islams 13(1971): 11-19.

Diem, W. and S. Wild (1980). Studien aus Arabisitk und Semitistik. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz.

Diem, W. (1980). Die genealogische Stellung des Arabischen in den semitischen Sprachen: Ein ungelostes Problem der Semitistik. Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 65-85.

Diem, W. (1981). “Secondary literature on Native Arabic grammar works.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 431-86.

Diem, W. (1985). “Die monophthongisierumg der diphthonge ay und aw im fruhen neuarabisch.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 14: 76-8.

Diem, W. (1987). “On the historical ordering of the inner passive in contemporary arabic dialects.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 91-2.

Diem, W. (1987). “A controversial passage: APHM 47 (Eine umstrittene Stelle: APHM 47).” Zeitschrift für arabische Linguistik 16: 120-2.

Ditters, E. (1984). “Extended affix grammars and modern Arabic syntax.” CCE: Compte-rendu: 42-44, I-V.



Ditters, E. (1985). “The structure of the masdar-noun phrase according to Abu Hayyan al’Andalusi.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 15: 67-79.

Ditters, E. (1986). An Extended Affix Grammar for the Noun Phrase in Modern Standard Arabic. Corpus Linguistics, II: New Studies in the Analysis and Exploration of Computer Corpora. J. Aarts and W. Meijs. Amsterdam, Rodopi. ii: 47-78.

Ditters, E. (1987). ASCAMSA: a system for the automated syntactic analysis of modern standard Arabic. Workshop on Arabic Morphology, Linguistic Institute, Stanford University.

Ditters, E. and N. Oostdijk (1987). Processing Arabic. TCMO, Nijmegen University, PO Box 9103, HD Nijmegen, Holland, Ditters and Oostdijk.

Ditters, E. (1989). ASCAMSA - a system for the automated syntactic analysis of modern standard Arabic. Arabic Morphology. A. Farghali and J. McCarthy.

Ditters, E. (1990). “Current bibliography on computer applications and Arabic.” Processing Arabic Report 5: 1-109.

Ditters, E. (1990). Descriptive tools for the automated syntactic processing of natural langauge: the case of Arabic Paper. 2nd International Conference of the Linguistic Society of Morocco, Rabat, Oct. 11-14.

Ditters, E. (1990). Arabic Corpus Linguistics in Past and Present. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II. K. Versteegh and M. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 10: 129-141.

Ditters, E. (1991). “A modern standard Arabic sentence grammar.” Bulletin d'Études Orientales XLIII, Damas: IFEAD: 197-236.

Ditters, E. (1991). Arabic. Humanities Computing Yearbook 1989-90. I. Lancashire. Oxford, Oxford University Press: 285-91.

Ditters, E. (1992). A Formal Approach to Arabic Syntax: the Noun Phrase and the Verb Phrase. Amsterdam, Rodopi.

Djite, P. G. (1992). “The Arabization of Algeria: Linguistic and Sociopolitical Motivations.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 98: 15-28.

Dobrisan, N. (1984). “Equivalents of Privative Prefixes in Arabic.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 29(5): 427-437.

Dobrisan, N. (1985). “Tendencies in the Verbal System of Contemporary Standard Arabic.” Revue Roumaine de Linguistique 30(3): 281-191.

Donald, G. C. W. (1979). “Arabic Words in English.” TESOL Newsletter 13(5): 31.

Doniach, N. S. (1982). The Concise Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current Usage. New York, Oxford UP.

Donner, F. M. (1984). “Some early Arabic inscriptions from al-Hanakiyya, Saudi Arabia.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 43(3): 181-208.

Doss, M. (1979). “The position of the demonstrative da, di in Egyptian Arabic: A diachronic inquiry.” Annales Islamologiques 15: 349-357.

Doss, M. (1985). La Norme linguistigue en Egypte: Pratiques et orientations. Seminaire CEDEJ-Institut, Cairo, Egypt.

Doss, M. (1987). “Further remarks on the use of b-imperfect in spoken Literary Arabic.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 93-5.

Dotan, A. (1987). From the Beginning of Medieval Hebrew-Arabic Lexicography. Proc. of Third International Conf. on History of Language Sciences. Papers in the History of Linguistics. H. Aarsleff, L. G. Kelly and H.-J. Niederehe. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xxv: 77-84.

Douglas, D. (1986). “From school to university: language policy and performance at the University of Khartoum.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 61: 89-112.

Doushaq, M. H. (1986). “An investigation into stylistic errors of Arab students learning English for academic purposes.” English for Specific Purposes 5(1): 27-39.



Dridi, H. (1984). “L'Expression dialectale arabe au Maghreb.” Franzosisch Heute 15(2): 197-204.

Driessen, G. (1992). “First and Second Language Proficiency: Prospects for Turkish and Moroccan Children in the Netherlands.” Language, Culture, and Curriculum 5(1): 23-40.

Drozdik, L. (1981). “Semantic Aspects of Lexical Borrowing in Arabic.” Asian & Afr. Studies (Bratislava). 17: 187-197.

Drozdik, L. (1983). “Descriptive Terms in the Lexicographical Treatment of Modern Written Arabic.” Graecolatina et Orientalia 15-16: 97-114.

Drozdik, L. (1985). “Structural and Lexical Variation of Descriptive Terms in the Lexicon of Modern Written Arabic.” GeO 27-28: 89-107.

Ducatez, G. and J. Ducatez (1980). “Formation of color and luminosity denominations in Classical and Pre-classical Arabic: A periodization attempt according to a linguistic and anthropological approach.” Mediterranean Peoples 10: 139-72.

Duchesne-Guillemin, J. (1986). Zwei Corrigenda. Studia Grammatica Iranica: Festschrift für Helmut Humbach. R. Schmitt and P. O. Skjaervo. Munich, R.Kitzinger: 45-46.

Durst, R. K. (1981). “Power and Solidarity - Attitudes of Western Pennsylvanians Toward Arabic-Accented and Spanish-Accented Speech.” TESOL Quarterly 15(4): 477.

Dweik, B. S. (1992). Lebanese Christians in Buffalo: Language Maintenance and Language Shift. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 100-118.

Ebert, G. and H.-G. Ebert (1987). “Zu einigen Aspekten der Sprachsituation und politik in der SLAVJ (Libyen) unter besonderer Berucksichtigung des Italienischen.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Serachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 40(3): 381-390.

Edwards, M. (1987). “The AUX Hypothesis and Egyptian Arabic.” Polyglot 8(1): F1-G7.

Ehmedov, M. (1989). “Stable Verbal Compositions and Their Classification According to the Nominal Component's Origin.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, Yazyk i Iskusstvo 3: 40-43.

Eid, M. (1982). “The non-randomness of diglossic variation in Arabic.” Glossa: An International Journal of Linguistics 16: 54-84.

Eid, M. (1983). “The copula function of pronouns.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 59(2-3): 197-207.

Eid, M. (1983). “On the communicative function of subject pronouns in Arabic.” Journal of Linguistics 19(2): 287-303.

Eid, M. (1984). “Syntactic Aspects of Arabic-English Code-Switching.” Paper presented at MESA Meeting, San Francisco.

Eid, M. (1984). The Favored Interpretation of Missing Subjects in Arabic. Linguistic Society of America Meeting.

Eid, M. (1985). “Linguistic Typology and the Study of Arabic Dialects.” Paper presented at MESA Meeting, New Orleans.

Eid, M. (1985). On the function of pronouns in Egyptian Arabic. Beyond the Sentence: Discourse and Sentential Form. J. R. Wirth. Ann Arbor, MI, Karoma Publications: 31-44.

Eid, M. (1987). “Arabic theoretical linguistics: the seventies and beyond.” Al-‘Arabiyya 20(1-2): 161-198.

Eid, M. (1987). Arabic Linguistics: The Current Scene. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 1: 3-38.

Eid, M. (1988). “Principles for Code-Switching between Standard and Egyptian Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 21: 51-80.

Eid, M., Ed. (1990). Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics I. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Eid, M. and J. McCarthy, Eds. (1990). Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science IV: Current Issues in Linguistic Theory. Amsterdam, Benjamins.



Eid, M. (1990). Arabic Linguistics: The Current Scene. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 3-37.

Eid, M. and J. McCarthy, Eds. (1990). Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics II. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Eid, M. (1991). Verbless Sentences in Arabic and Hebrew. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, BEnjamins. xii: 31-61.

Eid, M. (1992). Pronounces, Questions, and Agreement. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 107-142.

Eid, M. (1992). Directionality in Arabic-English Code-Switching. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 50-71.

Eid, M., V. Cantarino, et al., Eds. (1994). Perspectives on Arabic Lingusitics VI : Papers from the sixth annual symposium on Arabic Lingusitics. Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Eisele, J. C. (1987). “Arabic dialectology: a review of recent literature.” Al-‘Arabiyya 20(1-2): 199-270.

Eisele, J. (1988). The Syntax and Semantics of Tense, Aspect and Time Reference in Cairene Colloquial Arabic, University of Chicago.

Eisele, J. (1990). Time reference and formal aspect in Cairene Arabic. New Perspective in Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Eisele, J. (1990). Aspectual Classification of Verbs in Cairene Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 192-233.

Eisele, J. C. (1990). Time Reference, Tense, and Formal Aspect in Cairene Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 1: 173-212.

Eisele, J. (1992). Cairene Arabic Auxiliaries and the Category AUX. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 143-164.

Eksell, K. (1984). “On the development of d-particles as genitive exponents in Arabic dialects.” Acta Orientalia (Societates Orientales Danica, Fennica, Norvegica, Svecica) 45: 21-42.

Eksell Harning, K. (1980). The Analytic Genitive in the Modern Arabic Dialects. Goteborg, Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis.

El-Amrani, H. (1991). “Analyse syntaxique des 'arrets et retours' an arabe marocain.” Langues et Linguistique 17: 39-67.

El-Attar, S. (1985). “El bilinguismo en Al-Andaluz (Espana musulmana) y sus huellas en el castellano: Una vision sociolinguistica.” Nueva Revista del Pacifico 27-28: 23-44.

El-Badry, N. (1986). The Development of the Bilingual English-Arabic Dictionary from the Middle of the Nineteenth Century to the Present. The History of Lexicography: Papers from The Dictionary Research Centre Seminar at Exeter, March1986. R. R. K. Hartmann. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 57-63.

El-Badry, N. (1990). Arabic Lexicography in Northern Africa, with Special Reference to Egypt. Progress Reports from Dictionary Research Centre Workshop Exeter. Lexicography in Africa. R. R. K. Hartmann. Exeter, U of Exeter Press. 5: 36-43.

El-Bakry, F. A. (1990). Active Participle in Colloquial Egyptian Arabic: A Functional Analysis, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:3722A

El-Barouki, F. Y. (1985). A culturally based analysis of selected idiomatic expressions in Syriac Arabic, University of San Francisco.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:108A

El-Bawab, M. (1989). “Arabic morpho-syntax for computer.” ProcKuw2: 24-46.

El-Dalee, M. S. (1984). The Feature of Retraction in Arabic, Indiana University.



El-Ezabi, Y. A. (1967). The Sectors of Written Arabic. Report of the Eighteenth Annual Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and Language Studies. E. L. J. Blansitt. Washngton, DC, Georgetown UP: 175-1809.

El-Halees, Y. (1985). “The role of F1 in the place-of-articulation distinction in Arabic.” Journal of Phonetics 13(3): 287-298.

El-Halees, Y. A. (1987). “F2 and Back Articulations in Arabic.” Journal of the College of Arts, King Saud University 14(1): 21-44.

El-Halees, Y. (1989). “Experimental-Study of the Phonetic Feature of Emphasis in Arabic.” Folia Phoniatrica 41(4-5): 165-166.

El-Hassan, S. A. (1987). “Aspectual distinctions in English and written Arabic.” International Review of Applied Linguistics in Language Teaching 25(2): 131-8.

El-Hassan, S. (1988). “The Intonation of Questions in English and Arabic.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 22: 97-108.

El-Khafaifi, H. M. (1985). The role of the Cairo Academy in coining Arabic scientific terminology: an historical and linguistic evaluation, University of Utah.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:2678A

El-Mouloudi, A. B. (1986). Arabic Language Planning: The Case of Lexical Modernization, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2561A

El-Nekishbendy, A. M. A. (1990). Language Factors That May Cause Difficulties for American Adults Learning Arabic, University of Pittsburgh.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:3722A

El-Noory, A. Y. (1985). “Egyptian Arabic and English: nativization process.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 100-4.

El-Sayed, D. H. (1984). “Notes on the Arabization of the terminology of modern linguistics.” LEXeter ‘83: 333-8.

El-Sayed, A. M. (1989). “Politeness Formulas in English and Arabic: a Contrastive Study.” Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics 15(2): 96-113.

El-Sayegh, S. (1989). “A new connectionist computational approach as applied to Arabic linguistics.” ProcKuw2: 578-595.

El-Shiyab, S. (1992). The Structure of Argumentation in Arabic: Editorials as a Case Study, Heriot-Watt University.DAI No. BRDX94531

El-Solami-Mewis, C. (1987). “Zur Rolle und Behandlung arabischer Fremdworter im Somali.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 40(5): 676-683.

El-Tikaina, I. H. (1982). A Lexical Approach to the Arabic Verb Conjugations, University of Washington.

El-Yasin, M. (1982). Voice Phenomena in Jordanian Arabic, Cornell University.

El-Yasin, M. (1985). “Basic word order in Classical Arabic and Jordanian Arabic.” Lingua 65: 107-122.

Elamrani-Jamal, A. (1982). “Grammaire et logique d'apres le philosophe arabe chretien Yahya ibn 'Adi.” 29(1): 1-15.

Elamrani-Jamal, A. (1985). “The question of name and named [al-ism wa-l-musamma] in dialectics and grammar: On a text of Al-Batalyusi.” Journal of Arabic Lingusitics 15: 80-93.

Elamrani-Jamal, A. (1990). Verbe, copule, nom derive (fi'l, kalima, ism mustaqq) dans les commentaires arabes du Peri Hermeneias d'Aristote: Avec un texte inedit d'Ibn Rusd. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 151-164.

Elamrani-Jamal, A. (1990). Le Patrimoine linguistique arabe ancien: Problemes de relecture. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 143-149.



Elbaz, S. (1981). “La Subordination en arabe d'Oujda.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.): 333-344.

Elbiad, M. (1985). A Sociolinguistics Study of the Arabization Process and Its Conditioning Factors in Morroco, State University of New York at Buffalo.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3334A

Elbiad, M. (1991). “The Role of Some Population Sectors in the Progress of Arabization in Morocco.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 87: 27-44.

Eldar, I. (1981). “Hidayat Al-Qari: The Longer Arabic Version: A Specimen Text.” Leshonenu 45(3-4, 1981 April-July): 233-259.

Elgadi, A. S. (1986). Tripolitanean Arabic Phonology and Morphology: A Generative Approach, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:4375A

Elgibali, A. A. (1985). Towards a Sociolinguistic Analysis of Language Variation in Arabic: Cairene and Kuwaiti dialects, University of Pittsburgh.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:1713A

Elgibali, A. (1993). Stability and Language Variation in Arabic: Cairene and Kuwaiti Dialects. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Philadelphia & Amsterdam, John Benjamins. V: 75-96.

Elimam, A. (1986). “Choice of development model and glottopolitics (Choix de modele de developpement et glottopolitique).” Languages 21(83): 75-85.

Elimam, A. (1986). “Choix de modeles de developpement et glottopolitique.” Langages 83: 75-85.

Eliman, A. (1988). “A Contrastive Approach to Interlanguage: Study of the Particle ka in Creole and Moroccan Arabic.” Contrastes supplement A-8: 175-206.

Elliott, M. N. s. (1986). “Nasr's development as a writer in his second language: the first six months.” Australian Review of Applied Linguistics 9(2): 120-153.

Elshershabi, M. A. H. (1988). Substitution and Lexical Cohesion in the Editorial Argumentative Discourse of Arabic and American English, University of South Carolina.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1786A

Elter, I. (1981). “Nehany megjegyzes Ibn Hayyannak a magyarlok 942. evi spanyolorszagi kalandozasarol szolo tudositasahoz.” Magyar Nyelv 4: 413-419.

Emery, P. G. (1987). “Aspects of English-Arabic translation: a contrastive study.” The Linguist 26(2): 62-4.

Emery, P. G. (1988). “Compound Words in Modern Standard Arabic.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 32-43.

Emery, P. G. (1988). “Collocation-A Problem in Arabic/English Translation.” Quinquerime 11(2): 178-184.

Emery, P. G. (1988). Body-Part Collocations and Idioms in Arabic and English: A Contrastive Study, University of Manchester (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:1731A

Emery, P. G. (1989). “Legal Arabic Texts: Implications for Translation.” School Modern Languages 35(1): 1-11.

Emery, P. G. (1991). “Lexical Incongruence in Arabic-English Translation.” Babel: Revue Internationale de la Traduction 37: 129-137.

Emordi, F. I. (1990). “The current linguistic situtation in Nigeria: the place and status of the French language.” Cahiers de l'Institut de Linguistique de Louvain 16(2-4): 59-76.

Ennaji, M. (1988). “Language Planning in Morocco and Changes in Arabic.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 74: 9-39.



Er-Rayyan, M. R. H.-A. (1986). Toward the construction of a temporal system for natural language in the light of the data of the Arabic and English languages, University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:1714A

Esarey, G. R. (1987). Factors Affecting the Listening Comprehension and Attitude of Native Listeners to the Speech of Arabic Learners of English, University of Pittsburgh.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1130A

Ewan, W. G. (1979). “Laryngeal Behavior in Speech.” Report of the Phonology Laboratory 3(April): 1-93.

Fabri, R. (1993). Kongruenz und die Grammatik des Maltesischen. Tubingen, Niemeyer.

Faitelson-Weiser, S. and M. Blouin (1986). “-i: Ending and Suffix of Spanish Adjectives.” Langues et Linguistique 12: 27-57.

Fakhri, A. (1984). “The use of communicative strategies in narrative discourse: a case study of a learner of Moroccan Arabic as a second language.” Language Learning 34(3): 15-37.

Fanjul Garcia, S. (1981). El 'hawfi' de Tremecen: Aproximacion morfologica y tematica. Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 661-673.

Fanton, M. (1989). Computer analysis of Arabic words. Arabic Morphology. A. Farghali and J. McCarthy.

Fareh, S. I. (1988). Paragraph Structure in Arabic and English Expository Discourse, University of Kansas.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:1292A

Farghal, M. (1986). “Wh-movement in Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 3.2: 69-121.

Farghal, M. A. (1986). The Syntax of WH-Questions and Related Matters in Arabic, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:380A

Farghal, M. (1992). “Colloquial Jordanian Arabic Tautologies.” Journal of Pragmatics: An Interdisciplinary Monthly of Language Studies 17(no. 3, March 1992): 223-240.

Farghali, A. (1981). Topics in the Syntax of Egyptian Arabic, University of Texas-Austin.

Farhat, M. (1989). “A framework for modelling Arabic syntax.” ProcKuw2: 295 (1-15).

Farhat, H. (1991). Empty Categories in Syrian Arabic, University College of North Wales, Bangor (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 53:3510A

Farley, A. (1987). The ‘doubled’ verb of standard Arabic. Parasession on Autosegmental and Metrical Phonology. A. Bosch, B. Need and E. Schiller. Chicago, Chicago Linguistics Society. 23.

Farwaneh, S. (1988). Well-formed associations in Arabic: rule or condition. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 120-142.

Farwaneh, S. (1990). Well-Formed Associations in Arabic: Rule or Condition?. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 120-142.

Fayez, E. A. A. (1990). Siibawaih's Linguistic Analysis of the Diminutive in Classical Arabic and Its Subsequent Developments, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:3723A

Feghali, H. (1990). Arabic Adeni Reader. Wheaton, MD, Dunwoody Press.

Feghali, H. (1991). Arabic Adeni Textbook. Wheaton, MD, Dunwoody Press.

Fehri, A. F. (1975). Some Complement Phenomena in Arabic, Lexical Grammar, The Complementizer Phrase Hypothesis and the Non-Accessibility Condition. Analyses/Theorie. Vincennes, Publications of Paris VIII.



Fehri, A. F. (1975). Comparatives and Free Relatives in Arabic. Recherches Linguistique. Vincennes:, Publications of Paris-VIII. 7.

Fehri, A. F. (1981). “Theorie lexicale-fonctionnelle: Controle et accord en arabe moderne.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.): 299-332.

Fehri, A. F. (1984). Agreement in Arabic, binding and coherence. Agreement in Natural Language: Approaches, Theories, Descriptions. M. Barlow and C. A. Ferguson. Stanford, Center for the Study of Language and Information: 107-158.

Fehri, A. F. (1984). “Note a propos de la 'dislocation' accusative en arabe classique: Une Analyse et un point de methode.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 13: 7-15.

Fehri, A. F. (1985). allis:niyya:t wa llugha al arabiyya. Casablanca, Morocco, Toboqal Publishing Hs.

Fehri, A. F. (1987). Anti-Causatives in Arabic, Causativity and Affectedness. Lexicon Project Working Papers. Cambridge, MIT Center for Cognitive Science. 15.

Fehri, A. F. (1988). Agreement in Arabic, binding and coherence. Agreement in natural language: approaches, theories, descriptions. M. Barlow and C. A. Ferguson. Stanford, Stanford University Center for the Study of Language and Information: 107-158.

Fehri, A. F. (1992). “Sous-specification, accord et pronoms en arabe.” Revue Quebecoise de Linguistique 22(1): 117-144.

Fehri, A. F. (1993). Issues in the Structure of Arabic Clauses and Words;. Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Fell, B. (1979). “Tamacheq, a Living Dialect of Ancient Libyan.” The Epigraphic Society Occasional Papers 6(1): 31-34.

Fellman, J. (1982). “Maltese: A unique Arabic dialect.” Anthropos: International Review of Ethnology and Linguistics 77/5-6: 896-7.

Fellman, J. (1982). “Sociolinguistic similarities between two modern Semitic languages; Hebrew and Maltese.” Anthropos: International Review of Ethnology and Linguistics 77(5-6): 895-6.

Fenk, A. and G. Fenk (1980). “Constancy in short-term memory-Constancy in the flow of linguistic information?” Zeitschrift für Experimentelle und Angewandte Psychologie 27(3): 400-14.

Ferguson, C. A. (1983). “God-wishes in Syrian Arabic.” Mediterranean Language Review 1: 65-83.

Ferguson, C. A. (1988). “Standardization as a Form of Language Spread.” Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics: 119-132.

Ferguson, C. (1989). “Grammatical agreement in Classical Arabic and the modern dialects: a response to Versteegh's pidginization hypothesis.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 5-18.

Ferguson, C. A. (1990). 'Come Forth with a Surah Like It': Arabic as a Measure of Arab Society. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 39-51.

Ferrando, A. (1989). “Les interrelacions linguistiques en la Valencia doscentista: Comentaris a les aportacions de Robert I. Burns.” Zeitschrift für Katalanistik: Revista d'Estudis Catalans 2: 115-129.

Féghali, M. and A. Cuny (1924). Du genre grammatical en sémitique. Paris, Paul Geuthner.grammatical gender in Semitic, agreement

Finch, R. (1984). “The 'Emphatic' Consonants in the Semitic Languages.” Sophia Linguistica 17: 26-46.

Finch, R. (1986). “Prosodic templates for the sound triliteral verb of Arabic.” Sophia Linguistica 20-21: 179-200.

Fiorini, S. (1989). “A Note on Evidence for ll-dd in Maltese Onomastics.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20: 24-26.

Fischer, W. and O. Jastrow, Eds. (1980). Handbuch der arabischen Dialekte. Porta Linguarum Orientalium. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz.



Fischer, W. (1980). Der Beitrag der Araber zur Ortsnamengebung im Vorderen Orient. Erlanger Ortsnamen-Kolloquium: Ortsnamen als Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft. R. Schutzeichel and F. Tichy. Heidelberg, Winter: 27-32.

Fischer, W. (1980). “Die arabische Pluralbildung.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 70-88.

Fischer, W. (1982). Grundriss der arabischen Philologie, I: Sprachwissenschaft. Wiesbaden, Reichert.

Fischer, W. (1985). “The chapter on grammar in the Kitab Mafatih al-`Ulum.” Zeitschrift für arabische Linguistik 15: 94-103.

Fishman, J. A. and others, Eds. (1986). From Phonology to Society. The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson. Berlin, Germany, Mouton de Gruyter.

Flege, J. E. (1980). “Phonetic approximation in second language acquisition.” Language Learning 30/1: 117-34.

Flege, J. E. and R. Port (1981). “Cross–language phonetic interference: Arabic to English.” Language and Speech 24(1): 125-146.

Flege, J. E. (1987). “The instrumental study of L2 speech production: some methodological considerations.” Language Learning 37(2): 285-296.

Fodor, I. and C. Hageg, Eds. (1983). Language Reform: History and Future. Hamburg, Germany, Helmut Buske Verlag Hamburg.

Fokes, J., Z. S. Bond, et al. (1985). “Acquisition of the English Voicing Contrast by Arab Children.” Language and Speech 28(1): 81-92.

Forkel, F. (1980). Die sprachliche Situation im heutigen Marokko: Eine soziolinguistische Untersuchung. Hamburg, no publisher.

Forneas Besteiro, J. M. (1981). Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 45-107.

Forstner, M. (1984). “Problemes de traduction de la terminologie juridique de l'arabe moderne.” CGE: Compte-rendu: 87.

Fourakis, M. and G. K. Iverson (1985). “On the acquisition of second language timing patterns.” Language Learning 35(4): 431-442.

Fox, S. E. (1979). “Organizational and Creative Rules in Arabic.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 15: 121-125.

Fox, S. E. (1982). “Autosegmental phonology and Semitic.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 18: 131-9.

Fradkin, R. A. (1986). Markedness Theory and the Verb Systems of Russian and Arabic: Aspect, Tense, and Mood, Indiana State University.

Fradkin, R. A. (1991). “Marking, Markedness, Person-Gender-Number Patterning in the Arabic Tenses and Moods.” Folia Linguistica: Acta Societatis Lingisticae Europaeae, (FoLi) 25(3-4): 609-664.

Frantz-Murphy, G. (1981). “A comparison of the Arabic and earlier Egyptian contract formularies, part I: the Arabic contracts from Egypt (3rd/9th-5th/11th centuries).” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 40(3): 203-25.

Frantz-Murphy, G. (1981). “Corrigendum.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 40(4): 355-6.

Frantz-Murphy, G. (1988). “A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract Formularies, Part IV: Quittance Formulas.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 47(4): 269-280.

Frantz-Murphy, G. (1988). “A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract Formularies, Part III: The Idiom of Satisfaction.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 47(2): 105-112.

Frantz-Murphy, G. (1989). “A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract Formularies, Part V: Formulaic Evidence.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 48(2): 97-107.

Fraser, B. (1982). “On the status of speech act strategies.” Centrum 2(1): 5-26.

Frazier, W. (1976). A demonstration of a computer technique for investigating Arabic morphology, Ann Arbor, Michigan.



Fre Woldu, K. (1984). “Evidence of Auditory Similarity between Tigrinya Ejective /t/ and Arabic Emphatic /t/.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 123-138.

Freund, W. S. (1988). “The German Language in Tunisia. Myth or Reality?” IBLA, Revue de l'Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis 51(1 (161)): 151-162.

Frolova, O. B. (1981). “On the study of phraseological neologisms in Arabic press whose appearance shows the influence of the translations of Lenin's works.” Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura 36(4(20)): 50-3.

Frolova, O. B. (1981). “Ob izuchenii frazeologicheskikh neologizmov v arabskoi presse,voznikshikh pod vliianiem perovoda trudov V. I. Lenina.” Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta 20(Oct.): 50-53.

Fromm, W.-D. (1989). “On the Frequency Structure of Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 113-124.

Fujihara, K. (1989). “The Differences Between Processings for Letters and Numerals.” The Japanese Journal of Psychology 60(2): 76-82.

Fulei-Szanto, E. (1989). “Az igei predikatum es kategoriai.” Nyelvtudomanyi Kozlemenyek 33(2): 181-185.

Fuller, J. W. and J. Gundel (1987). “Topic–prominence in interlanguage.” Language Learning 37(1): 1-18.

Gaballa, H. E.-B. (1986). Case-marking and classical Arabic; a semantic and historiographic study, University of Delaware.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:3411A

Gabr, R. (1986). La Designation de l'homme et de la femme dans le Coran: Etude statistique. Methodes quantitatives et informatiques dans l'etude des textes/Computers in Literary and Linguistic Research: En hommage a Charles Muller. Geneva, Slatkine: 421-431.

Gai, A. (1981). “Two Points of Arabic Grammar.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(1981 June-Sept.): 293-298.

Gai, A. (1983). “The Substantival-Adjectival Plurals of Participles in Arabic.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 10: 79-85.

Galinski, J. (1989). “The human reading process in Arabic: toward an experimental investigation.” Processing Arabic Report 4: 13-21.

Gallagher, E. B. (1985). “Medical education in Saudi Arabia: a sociological perspective on modernization and language.” Journal of Asian and African Studies 20(1-2): 1-12.

Galmes de Fuentes, A. (1981). “The Language and Style of Aljamid-Moorish Literature.” Neuva Revista de Filologia Hispanica 30(2): 420-440.

Galmes de Fuentes, A. (1991). “Hispanizacion de terminos tecnicos de la poesia arabigoandaluza relacionada con la romanica.” Boletin de la Real Academia Espanola 71: 455-460.

Gamzatov, R. E. (1980). “Linguistic development in Daghestan under conditions of far-advance socialist society.” Voprosy yazkoznaniya 29(3): 123-8.

Garding, E., M. Lindau, et al. (1986). “Final Report: Phonetic Analyses of Some Non-European Languages (LUCLA).” Working Papers 29: 115-138.

Garnica, O. K. and R. K. Herbert (1979). “Some Phonological Errors in Second Language Learning: Interference Doesn't Tell It All.” International Journal of Psycholinguistics 6(2(14)): 5-19.

Garr, W. R. (1985). Dialect Geography of Syria-Palestine, 1000-586 B.C.E. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press.

Gatje, H. (1979). “Probleme semantischer Identitat und Diversitat in der arabischen Nationalgrammatik.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 3(1979): 7-27.

Gatje, H. (1985). “Arabische Lexicographie: Ein Historischer Uberblick.” Historiographia Linguistica: International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences 12(1-2): 105-147.

Gatzlaff, M. (1986). “Zur kulturhistorischen Stratifikation des Hindi-Wortschatzes.” Linguistischen Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte 148: 66-



79.

Gatzlaff, M. (1986). “On the Cultural-Historical Stratification of the Hindi Vocabulary.” Linguistische Studien 148: 66-79.

Gazagnadou, D. (1986). “Une Precision sur l'origine du mot arabe funduq.” Studia Islamica 64: 165-167.

Gegov, K. (1981). “Observations of Bulgarian and Arabic vocalism.” Supstavitelno Exikoznanie/Contrastive Linguistics 6(6): 25-9.

Gegov, K. (1989). “The Bulgarian Velar Consonant /x/ and Three Arabic Fricative Consonants.” Contrastive Linguistics 14(2): 21-24.

Gegov, K. (1992). “Bulgarskata pregradna suglasna /k/ i arabskite pregradni suglasni /k/ i /q/.” Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie/Sopostavitel'noe Jazykoznanie/Contrastive Linguistics 17(4): 19-21.

Gehman, H. S. (1982). “Arabic Syntax of the Relative Pronoun in Poema de mio Cid and Don Quijote.” Hispanic Review 50: 53-60.

Gelder, G. J. v. (1991). “Musawir al-Warraq and the Beginnings of Arabic Gastronomic Poetry.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 36(no. 2): 309-327.

Ghaladant, S. A. S. i. (1982). Harakat al-lughah al-'arabiyah wa-adabiha fi Nayjiriyah min sanat 1804 ila sanat 1966. Cairo, Dar al-Ma'arif.

Ghali, M. M. (1983). “Pharyngeal Articulation (Especially in Arabic and English).” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies-University of London 46(3): 432.

Ghazali, S. (1983). “Elements of Arabic phonetics.” Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Proceedings: 43-50.

Ghazeli, S. (1981). “La Coarticulation de l'emphase en arabe.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.): 251-277.

Ghobrial, A. N. (1993). Discourse Markers in Colloquial Egyptian Arabic: A Pragmatic Perspective, Boston University.Dissertation Abstracts International 53:4299A

Ghowail, T. I. (1987). The acoustic phonetic study of the two pharyngeals /h;?/ and the two laryngeals /?,h/ in Arabic, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:1189A

Ghrib, E. M. (1983). “The introduction of Arabic as a medium of instruction in the Tunisian educational system.” Al-‘Arabiyya 16(1-2): 109-130.

Giacomi, A. (1986). Processus de structuration de l’enonce en acquisition et interaction. Acquisition d’une Langue Etrangere: Perspectives et Recherches. A. Giacomi and D. Veronique. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 285-303.

Giacomi, A. and R. Vion (1986). “Metadiscursive Processes in the Acquisition of a Second Language.” Studies in Second Lang. Acquisition 8(3): 355-368.

Giannetti, G. and P. Hodes (1980). “A cooperative bilingual effort in Michigan.” Foreign Language Annals 13(2): 93-8.

Giannini, A. (1982). The Emphatic Consonants in Arabic. Naples, Istituto Univ. Orientale, Seminario di Studi dell'Europa Orientale, Laboratorio di Fonetica Sperimentale.

Gilyanova, L. V. (1988). “Perception and Identification of Russian Vowels Produced by Arab Speakers.” Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura 43(1 (2)): 99-101.

Ginesy, M. and A. Lipcey (1990). “Systemes de fautes de l'etudiant d'anglais.” Sigma: Revue de Centre d'Etudes Linguistiques d'Aix 14: 193-220.

Givon, T. (1980). “The binding hierarchy and the typology of complements.” Studies in Language 4(3): 333-77.

Glass, D. (1989). “Watan, autan: Word-Concept-Text.” Linquistische Studien 189: 99-112.

Glinert, L. (1989). “A Note on the Morphology of Sequential Counting Forms: The Case of Modern Hebrew.” Journal of Semitic Studies 34(1): 179-181.



Glover, B. C. (1988). The Morphophonology of Muscat Arabic, University of California, Los Angelos.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:2200A

Goetz, M. (1980). Bemerkungen zu den Tempora des Althocharabischen. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild: 86-98.

Goldmann, I. (1989). “Interference-Conditioned Errors in Arabic Instruction: Presented on a Corpus of Translations of the German Prepostion an into Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 141-151.

Goldziher, I. (1994). On the History of Grammer Among the Arabs. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Gordon, D. C. (1985). The Arabic Language and National Identity: The Cases of Algeria and of Lebanon. Language Policy and National Unity. W. R. Beer and J. E. Jacob. Totowa, NJ, Rowman & Allanheld: 134-150.

Gorska, E. (1985). “Arabic Dictionaries in Anagrammatical Arrangement.” Folia Orientalia 23: 161-173.

Gorska, E. (1990). “The Process of Compound Lexical Items Formation in Modern Written Arabic.” Folia Orientalia 27: 173-184.

Gorska, E. (1990). “The Character of the Heads of Multiattributive Nominal Groups and Their Frequency in Modern Newspaper Arabic.” Folia Orientalia 27: 161-171.

Gotz, M. (1980). Bemerkungen zu den Tempora des Althocharabischen. Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 86-98.

Grand'Henry, J. (1981). Les Niveaux de Langue dans la Posie Populaire Arabe du Maghreb. Bono Homini Donum. Y. Arbeitman and A. R. Bomhard. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 16: 651-658.

Grand'Henry, J. (1990). “The Grammarians' taltala and the Speech of Al-Andalus.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21: 40-46.

Grand'Henry, J. (1991). “Les Variantes de flexion dans les verbes gemines en arabe.” Folia Orientalia 28: 99-114.

Grandguillaume, G. (1982). “Languages and dialects: The linguistic situation in the Maghreb.” Les Langues Modernes 76(3): 288-92.

Grandguillaume, G. (1982). “Language and community in the Maghreb.” Mediterranean Peoples 18: 49-58.

Grandguillaume, G. (1985). “A subverted father and a forbidden language.” Mediterranean Peoples 33: 163-82.

Grandguillaume, G. (1991). “Arabisation et langues maternelles dans le contexte national au Maghreb.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 87: 45-54.

Gravel, L.-A. (1972). A Sociolinguistic Investigation of Multilingualism in Morocco, Columbia University Teachers College.Dissertation Abstracts International 39:7318A

Greenberg, J. H. (1991). The logical bases of linguistic prescriptivism: A parallel between Classical grammarians and Moslem legal theorists. Languages in school and society: Policy and pedagogy. M. E. McGroarty and C. J. Faltis. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter.

Gregory, S. W., Jr. and K. M. S. Wehba (1986). “The contexts of Inshaallah in Alexandria Egypt.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 95-105.

Greppin, J. A. C. (1986). “Arabic pharmaceutical terms in Middle Armenian.” Annual of Armenian Linguistics 7: 65-71.

Greppin, J. A. C. (1987). “Some early botanical loan words shared by Armenian and Semitic.” Annual of Armenian Linguistics 8: 73-82.

Greppin, J. A. C. (1987). “The fate of Arabic botanical loanwords in modern Armenian.” The Mankind Quarterly 27(3): 283-94.

Greppin, J. A. C. (1988). “The Etymology of Pastrami.” Journal of English Linguistics 21(2): 125-126.

Grigor'eva, Z. V. (1985). “Types of Agental Complement in Passive Participle Constructions in Modern Arabic.” Vestnik Leningradskogo



Universiteta, Istoriay-yazyk-literatura 40(1(2)): 108-110.

Grotzfeld, H. (1980). “Ein falsch(verstanden)er Elativ: Gleichzeitig ein kleiner Beitrag zur kontrastiven Grammatik.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 89-92.

Grotzfeldt, H. (1983). “Hans Wehr (1909-1981).” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft 133(1): 5-10.

Grozdanova, L. A. (1989). “Negation in English and Maltese: Common Rules and Typological Differences.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 95-99.

Grozdanova, L. A. (1991). “Otritsanie v angliiskiia, bulgarskiia i maltiiskiia ezik - obshti pravila i tipologichni razlichiia.” Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie 16(2): 5-9.

Gruber-Miller, A. M. (1990). Loss of Nominal Case Endings in the Modern Arabic Sedentary Dialects: Evidence from Southern Palestinian Christian Middle Arabic Texts. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 235-253.

Gruber-Miller, A. M. (1992). Internal Developments in the Loss of Arabic Case Endings, Ohio State University.DAI No. DA9201670

Guerti, M. (1983). Contribution a la synthese de la parole par diphones en Arab Standard, University of Algiers.

Guespin, L. and F. Laroussi (1989). “Glottopolitique et standardisation terminologique.” Banque des Mots supp: 5-21.

Guillaume, J.-P. (1981). “Le Statut des Representations sous-Jacentes en Morphonologies d'Apres Ibn Ginni.” Arabic 28(2-3): 222-241.

Guillaume, J.-P. (1986). “Sibawayhi and enunciation: A proposed reading (Sibawayhi et l’enonciation: une proposition de lecture).” Histoire Epistemologie Langage 8(2): 53-62.

Guillaume, J.-P. (1988). “'Le Discours tout entier est nom, verbe et particule': Elaboration et constitution de la theorie des parties du discours dans la tradition grammaticale arabe.” Languages 92(Dec 1988): 25-36.

Guindy, A.-K. (1988). “On the Stress in the "Madrasa" Word Structure in Cairene Colloquial Arabic.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 18: 33-58.

Gully, A. J. (1992). Aspects of Semantics, Grammatical Categories and Other Liguistic Considerations in Ibn-Hisham's "Mughni al-Labib', University of Exeter.DAI No. BRDX95863

Gully, A. J. (1993). “The Changing Face of Modern Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 26: 19-59.

Gwynne, R. (1989). “Qiyas al-Qiyas fi Kitab Sibawayh.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 55-56.

Gwynne, R. (1990). The A Fortiori Argument in Fiqh, Nahw, and Kalam. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 165-177.

Haarmann, U. (1981). An Eleventh Century Precis of Arabic Orthography. Festschrift for Ihsan 'Abbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. Studia Arabica et Islamica. W. Al-Qadi. Beirut, American Univ. of Beirut. xv: 165-182.

Haarmann, U. (1988). “Arabic in Speech, Turkish in Lineage, Mamluks and Their Sons in the Intellectual Life of 14th-Century Egypt and Syria.” Journal of Semitic Studies 33(1): 81-114.

Habeeb, R. A. (1985). The role of the Saudi broadcasting system in the utilization of the classical form of the Arabic language in preserving culture, Wayne State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:19A

Haddad, G. and M. Kenstowicz (1980). “A note on the parallels between the definite article and the relative clause marker in Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 141-7.



Haddad, A. (1981). “Linguistics and religions. The case of Arabic: Sacred language of Islam.” Africanistique 10: 1-15.

Haddad, G. (1984). Problems and Issues in the Phonology of Lebanese Arabic, University of Illinois-Urbana.

Haddad, G. F. (1984). “Epenthesis and Sonority in Lebanese Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 14(1): 57-88.

Hadeli, O. M. (1971). A Descriptive Constrative Analysis of English and Arabic Verbs, New York University.Dissertation Abstracts International 32:5533A

Haeri, N. (1987). Male/Female Differences in Speech: An Alternative Interpretation. Symposium on Language and Gender, Salt Lake City: University of Utah.

Haeri, N. (1991). Sociolinguistic Variation in Cairene Arabic: Palatalization and the Qaf in the Speech of Men and Women, University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:898A

Haeri, N. (1992). How Different are Men and Women: Palatalization in Cairo. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 165-180.

Hafez, O. (1991). “Turn-Taking in Egyptian Arabic - Spontaneous Speech vs Drama Dialog.” Journal of Pragmatics 15(1): 59-81.

Haile, A. and A. Mtenje (1988). “In Defense of the Autosegmental Treatment of Nonconcatenative Morphology.” Journal of Linguistics 24(2): 433-455.

Hakim, K. N. (1986). Arabic Negation: A Functional Analysis, University of San Francisco.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:3688A

Halila, H. (1985). “Some syllable structure based rules of Tunisian Arabic.” Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9: 135-40.

Halila, H. (1992). Subject Specificity Effects in Tunisian Arabic, U of Southern California.

Halimah, A. M. (1992). EST Writing: Rhetorically Processed and Produced: A Case Study of Kuwaiti Learners, University of Essex.

Hamad, A. H. (1986). Diglossia in the phonology of second language, University of Nebraska-•••Lincoln.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2563A

Hamad, B. J. (1992). Wad Dayf Allah as a Historian: Analytical, Literary and Linguistic Study of 'Kitab at-Tabaqat', University of Texas at Austin.DAI No. DA9225590

Hameed, J. K. (1985). “Level-Ordered Morphology and Phonology of Iraqi Arabic.” Cahiers Linguistiques d'Ottawa 13(May): 63-75.

Hameen-Anttila, J. (1987). “Arabic muzn- and the Common Semitic Root *znm 'Rain'.” Acta Orientalia 48: 15-17.

Hameen-Anttila, J. (1992). “An Early Arabic Loan from Persian: Yada (d-dahr) - Parthian Yad o.” Acta Orientalia (Societates Orientales Danica, Fennica, Norvegica, Svecica) 53: 21-27.

Hamid, A. H. (1984). A Descriptive Analysis of Sudanese Colloquial Arabic Phonology, University of Illinois-Urbana.

Hammond, M. (1985). “Metrical Structure in Lenakel and the Directionality-Dominance Hypothesis.” Minnesota Papers in Linguistics and Philosophy of Language 10(Apr): 66-79.

Hammond, M. (1988). “Templatic Transfer in Arabic Broken Plurals.” Natural Language and Lingustic Theory 6: 147-270.

Hamze, H. (1989). “La Coordination a un pronom 'conjoint' dans la tradition grammaticale arabe.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 36(3): 249-271.

Handhal, F. (1987). A Glossary of the Dialect of the United Arab Emirates Transcribed and Arranged According to the English Alphabet,



University of Exeter (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1131A

Hannaoui, A. (1987). Diglossia, Medial Arabic, and Language Policy in Morocco, State University of New York at Stony Brook.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:2054A

Hansford, K. and G. Hansford (1989). “Borrowed Words in Chumburung.” African Languages and Culture 2(1): 39-50.

Harkat, M. (1985). “Analysis of Arabic poetry pattern by computer.” Workshop Papers Kuwait 2.

Harms, R. T. (1981). “A backwards metrical approach of Cairo Arabic stress.” Linguistic Analysis 7(4): 429-450.

Harning, K. E. (1980). The Analytic Genitive in the Modern Arabic Dialects. Orientalia Gothoburgensia. Götenborg, Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis. 5.

Harris, B. (1969). Echantillon de Transcodage Arabe-Anglais au Niveau du Morpheme. Montreal, University of Montreal.

Hartmann, R. (1982). “Reflections of the Arabic version of asterix: A translation comparison.” Linguistische Berichte 81: 1-31.

Hary, B. H. (1987). Judeo-Arabic, Written and Spoken in Egypt in the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries, University of California, Berkeley.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1443A

Hary, B. (1989). “Middle Arabic: proposals for new terminology.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 19-36.

Hashim, K. M. Z. (1980). Sentential Complements in Egyptian Colloquial Arabic, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:686A

Hass, W., Ed. (1982). Standard Languages: Spoken and Written. Mont Follick Series. Manchester, Manchester University Press.

Hassan, E. T. E. M. E. (1988). “Right-to-Left/Left-to-Right Thinking Revisited.” ESPMENA Bulletin 25(Jan): 17-33.

Hassan, H. M. (1990). A Contrastive Study of Tense and Aspect in English and Arabic with Special Reference to Translation, University of Bath (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 51:2366A

Hassanain, K. S. A. (1988). A Sociolinguistic Study: Address Rule System in the Western Region of Saudi Arabia.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1443A

Hassoun, J. (1982). “The Truchement.” Meta 27(1): 199-24.

Hatim, B. (1984). “A text-typological approach to syllabus design in translator training.” The Incorporated Linguist 23(3): 146-9.

Hatim, B. (1987). A Text Linguist Model for the Analysis of Discourse Errors: Contributions from Arabic Linguistics. Grammar in the Construction of Texts. London:, Pinter: 102-13.

Hatim, B. (1987). Discourse Texture in Translation: Towards a Text-Typological Redefinition of Theme and Rheme. Proc. of Conf. Held at Heriot-Watt Univ., Edinburgh, 5-7 Jan. 1986. Translation in the Modern Language Degree. H. Keith and I. Mason. London, Regent's College: 52-62.

Hatim, B. (1989). “Text Linguistics in the Didactics of Translation: The Case of the Verbal and Nominal Clause Types in Arabic.” Dept Languages Heriot-Watt U 27(2): 137-144.

Hawas, H. M. (1989). “The Articles in English and Arabic: A Contrastive Study.” Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics 15(2): 23-51.

Hawkins, P. (1983). “Diglossia Revisited.” Language and Communication 3(3): 219-32.

Haydar, Y. and M. Mrayati (1985). “A Study of Intonation, and the Melodic Curve of Phrases in Standard Arabic.” Travaux de l'Institut de Phonetique de Strasbourg 17: 75-118.



Hayes, B. (1986). “Inalterability in CV phonology.” Language 62(2): 321-51.

Hayes, B. (1987). Compensatory lengthening in Moraic phonology. 13th Ann. Minn. Conference on Lang. and Ling.

Hayward, R. J., K. M. Hayward, et al. (1988). “Vowels in Jibali Verbs.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 51(3): 240-250.

Haywood, J. A. (1986). The Entry in Medieval Arabic Monolingual Dictionaries: Some Aspects of Arrangement and Content. The History of Lexicography: Papers from The Dictionary Research Centre Seminar at Exeter, March1986. R. R. K. Hartmann. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 107-113.

Hazout, I. (1991). Verbal Nouns: Theta Theoretic Studies in Hebrew and Arabic, University of Massachesetts.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:2126A

Heath, J. (1982). “A Judeo-Arabic Dialect of Tafilalt (Southeastern Morocco).” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 9: 32-78.

Heath, J. (1986). “Hasta la mujerra! and other instances of playful language mixing in Morocco.” Mediterranean Language Review2: 113-116.

Heath, J. (1987). Ablaut and Ambiguity: Phonology of a Moroccan Arabic Dialect. New York, State University of New York Press.

Heath, J. (1987). Ablaut and Ambiguity in Morrocan Arabic. Albany, SUNY Press.

Heath, J. and B. Ingham (1989). From Code-Switching to Borrowing: Foreign and Diglossic Mixing in Moroccan Arabic. London, Kegan Paul International.

Heddad, G. and M. Kenstowicz (1980). “A Note on the Parallels between the Definite Article and the Relative Clause Marker in Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 141-147.

Heger, K. (1989). “On Pluricentric Language Culture.” Zeitschrift für Germanistische Linguistik 17(2): 226-228.

Hegyi, O. (1981). “Reflections of medieval multiculturalism: The three alphabets for Iberian romance.” Neuva Revista de Filologia Hispanica 30(1): 92-103.

Heine, P. (1982). “Verzeichnis der Schriften von Hans Wehr.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 8: 7-11.

Heliel, M. H. (1982). “Stress timing in Modern Literary Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 15(1-2): 90-107.

Heliel, M. H. (1984). “The Rhythmic Unit in Modern Literary Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 17(1-2): 5-24.

Heliel, M. H. (1987). “Definitions of Linguistic Terms in an English-Arabic Dictionary.” Dictionaries: Journal of the Dictionary Society of North America 9: 133-148.

Henkin, R. (1992). “The Three Faces of the Arabic Participle in Negev Bedouin Dialects: Continuous, Resultative, and Evidential.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 55(3): 433-444.

Henkin, R. (1993). “'To Be' (or Not) in the Bedouin Arabic Dialect of the Ahaywat (Sinai).” Mediterranean Language Review 6-7: 173-197.

Herbolich, J. B. (1979). “The Development of Semantic Differential Scales in Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 12(1-2): 20-43.

Herbolich, J. B. (1979). “Attitudes of Egyptians Toward Various Arabic Vernaculars.” Lingua 47(4): 301-321.

Hermans, B. (1991). Eliminating Destressing Rules. Linguistics in the Netherlands. F. Drijkoningen and A. Van Kemenade. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 10: 51-60.

Herzallah, R. S. (1990). Aspects of Palestinian Arabic Phonology: A Nonlinear Approach. Ithaca, Dept. of Modern Languages and Linguistics at Cornell University.



Hinds, M. and E.-S. Badawi (1986). Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic. Beirut, Librairie du Liban.

Hlal, Y. (1985). “Morphology and syntax of the Arabic language.” Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Informatics 4C: 1-8.

Hlal, Y. (1985). “Morphological analysis of Arabic speech.” Workshop Papers Kuwait/Proceedings Kuwait89 section 13: 273-94.

Hlal, Y. (1990). Morphology and Syntax of the Arabic Language. Computers and the Arabic Language. P. A. MacKay. New York, Hemisphere: 201-207.

Hoberman, R. (1988). “Local and long-distance spreading in semitic morphology.” Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 6: 541-550.

Hoberman, R. D. (1989). “Parameters of Emphasis: Autosegmental Analyses of Pharyngealization in Four Languages.” Journal of Afroasiatic Languages 2(1): 73-97.

Hofman, J. E. and A. M. Habib (1982). “The cloze technique in Arabic: words or semantic units?” Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 11(4): 275-82.

Hofner, M. (1983). Zur Funktion von Infinitiv und Demonstrativen im Altsudarabischen. Ethiopian Studies: Dedicated to Wolf Leslau on the Occasion of His Seventy-Fifth Birthday, November 14th, 1981 by Friends and Colleagues. S. Segert, A. J. E. Bodrogligeti, M. S. Devens, M. Rodinson and B. M. Sahle Sellasie. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 232-235.

Holes, C. (1980). “Phonological Variation in Bahraini Arabic: The (j) and (y) Allophones of /j/.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 4: 72-89.

Holes, C. (1983). “Bahraini dialects: sectarian differences and the sedentary/nomadic split.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 10: 7-38.

Holes, C. (1983). “Patterns of Communal Language Variation in Bahrain.” Language in Society 12(4): 433-457.

Holes, C. (1984). “Bahraini dialects: sectarian differences exemplified through texts.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 13: 27-67.

Holes, C. (1986). “The social motivation for phonological convergence in three Arabic dialects.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 61: 33-51.

Holes, C. (1986). “Variation in the morphophonolgy of Arabic dialects.” Transactions of the Philological Society: 167-90.

Holes, C. (1986). “Communicative Function and Pronominal Variation in Bahraini Arabic.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 10-30.

Holes, C. and B. Ingham (1987). Language Variation and Change in a Modernising Arab State: The Case of Bahrain. London, Kegan Paul International.

Holes, C. (1989). “Towards a Dialect Geography of Oman.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 52(3): 446-462.

Holes, C. (1993). The Uses of Variation: A Study of the Political Speeches of Gamal Abdal al-Nasir. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 5: 13-46.

Holmberg, B. (1989). “The Public Debate as a Literary Genre in Arabic Literature.” Orientalia Suecana (OS) 38-39(1989-1990): 45-53.

Homeidi, M. A. (1988). Modality in Government and Binding: Evidence from Arabic and English, University of Essex (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:9C

Hopkins, S. (1984). Studies in the grammar of Early Arabic. Oxford, Oxford University Press.

Houdaifa, E.-T. (1986). Quelques aspects de la grammaire des verbes et, en particulier, des verbes de mouvement dans un corpus de migrant. Acquisition d'une langue etrangere: Perspectives et recherches. A. Giacomi and D. Veronique. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 447-473.

Howell, M. S. (1986). A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language. Delhi, Gian Publishing House.

Hudson, G. (1985). “The Arabic doubled verb conspiracy and morpheme invariance.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 141-5.



Hudson, G. (1986). “Arabic root and pattern morphology without tiers.” Journal of Linguistics 22: 85-122.

Hudson, G. (1991). “On a Defence of Autosegmentalism.” Journal of Linguistics 27(1): 163-177.

Hull, G. (1989). “The Origin of the Name 'Kirkop'.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 58-61.

Humbert, G. (1990). Remarques sur les editions du Kitab de Sibawayhi et leur base manuscrite. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 179-194.

Hussain, A. (1987). An experimental investigation of some aspects of the sound system of the Gulf Arabic dialect with special reference to duration, University of Essex (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 48:•10C

Hussein, R. (1980). The case of triglossia in Arabic(with special emphasis on Jordan), State University of New York-Buffalo.

Hussein, R. F. I. (1980). The Case of Triglossia in Arabic: With Special Emphasis on Jordan, State University of New York at Buffalo.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:194A

Hussein, R. F. and N. El Ali (1989). “Subjective reactions of rural university students toward different varieties of Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 37-54.

Hussein, A. A. (1989). “The Use of Cloze Procedure in Assessing the Impact of Non-Verbal Information on Native/Non-Native English Speakers' Comprehension.” ESPMENA Bulletin 26: 10-23.

Hussein, R. F. and N. El-Ali (1989). “Subjective Reactions of Rural University Students toward Different Varieties of Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 37-54.

Hussein, L. (1990). “VCV Coarticulation in Arabic.” Working Papers in Linguistics 38: 88-104.

Hussein, L. (1990). “Serial Verbs in Colloquial Arabic.” Working Papers in Linguistics 39: 340-354.

Hussein, R. F. and M. R. Zughoul (1993). “Lexical Interference in Journalistic Arabic in Jordan.” Language Sciences 15(3): 239-254.

Huxley, F. C. (1986). “Contrasting semantic structures in English and Arabic: problem and promise in second-language learning.” Anthropology and Education Quarterly 17(2): 67-99.

Huybregts, R. (1991). Allosteric Agreement in VSO Languages. Linguistics in the Netherlands 1991. F. Drijkoningen and A. v. Kemenade. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 81-90.

Ibrahim, A. H. (1979). “Etude comparee des systemes verbaux de l'arabe egyptien, de l'arabe moderne et du francais.” Lingvisticae Investigationes: Revue Internationale de Linguistique Francaise et de Linguistique Generale 3: 166-170.

Ibrahim, A. H. (1982). “Risks and obstacles of translation of belonging: From French to Arabic through English, Italian, German and Dutch.” Le Francias dans le Monde 22(170): 39-46.

Ibrahim, M. H. (1982). On the Contrast between (ae) and (a) in Modern Arabic. The XIIIth International Congress of Linguists, Tokyo, Tokyo Press.

Ibrahim, M. H. (1982). “Radical Reduplication in Arabic.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 9: 82-87.

Ibrahim, M. H. (1983). “Linguistic distance and literacy in Arabic.” Journal of Pragmatics 7(5): 507-15.

Ibrahim, A. H. (1984). Sur le statut de quelques 'accidents' syntactico-semantiques. Actes du Colloque de Rennes, Univ. de Haute-Bretagne. De la syntaxe a la pragmatique. P. Attal and C. Muller. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 241-259.

Ibrahim, M. H. (1986). “Standard and prestige language: a problem in Arabic sociolinguistics.” Anthropological linguistics 28(1): 115-26.



Ibrahim, M. H. (1989). Communicating in Arabic: Problems and Prospects. Language Adaptation. F. Coulmas. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press: 39-59.

Idrissi-Bouyahyaoui, B. (1987). Metalinguistic Awareness in Literate and Illiterate Children and Adults: A Psycholinguistic Study, University of Edenburgh (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:494A

Ineichen, G. (1979). “La descrizione della relativa: Un problema di grammatica contrastiva.” AN 80-3-149,: 517-524.

Ingham, B. (1982). North East Arabian Dialects. London, Kegan Paul Internat.

Ingham, B. (1984). “In Memoriam T. M. Johnstone.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 12: 7-8.

Ingham, B. (1986). “Notes of the Dialect of the Al Murra of Eastern and Southern Arabia.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 49(2): 271-291.

Ingham, B. (1991). “Subordinate Clauses of Time and Condition in Bedouin Dialects.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 54(1): 42-62.

Ioup, G. (1984). “Is there a structural foreign accent? A comparison of syntactic and phonological errors in second language acquisition.” Language Learning 34(2): 1-17.

Irsheid, O. M. and M. Kenstowicz (1984). “Some phonological rules of Bani-Hassan Arabic: a Bedouin dialect.” Studies in the Linguistics Sciences 14(1): 109-47.

Irshied, O. (1984). The Phonology of Arabic: Bani Hassan—A Bedouin Jordanian Dialect, University of Illinois-Urbana.Dissertation Abstracts International 45/11 3339A

Isaev, M. I. and E. R. Tenishev (1990). “Ossetica - Turcica.” Voprosy Iazykoznaniia 6: 140-143.

Isaksson, B. (1991). “The Personal Markers in the Modern Arabic Dialects of the Arabian Peninsula.” Orientalia Suecana (OS) 40: 117-145.

Isteitiya, S. S. (1984). The Phonetics and Phonology of Classical Arabic As Described by Al-Jurjani's Al-Muqtasad, The University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:2083A

Itkonen, E. (1989). “Havaintoja Arabian kielitieteesta.” Virittaja: Journal de Kotikielen Seura 93(3): 466-479.

Izhar, N. (1990). “Patient Origins and Usage of a Unani Clinic in Aligarh Town, India.” Social Science & Medicine 30(10): 1139.

Jabeur, M. (1987). A Sociolinguistic Study in Tunisia: Rades, University of Reading (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:495A

Jackson, M. (1987). “The migration of a name: reflections on Alexander in Africa.” Cultural Anthropology 2(2): 235-54.

Jacquemond, R. (1992). Translation and Cultural Hegemony: The Case of French-Arab Translation. Rethinking Translation: Discourse, Subjectivity, Ideology. L. Venuti. London, Routledge. 1992 xi: 139-158.

Jaeggli, O. and K. J. Safir, Eds. (1989). The Null Subject Parameter. Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Jankowski, H. (1989). “Word Order in Iraqi Arabic.” Lingua Posnaniensis: Czasopismo Poswiecone Jezykoznawstwu Poronownawczemu i Ogolnemu 32-33: 109-112.

Jankowsky, K. R., Ed. (1985). Scientific and Humanistic Dimensions of Language. Festschrift for Robert Lado. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Jarrar, W. S. S. (1992). The Grammatical Concept of Causality in Arabic: A study and an Annotated Translationof al-Zajjaji's Book 'al-Idah 'llal al-Nahw' (On Explaining Grammatical Causes), Indiana University.DAI No. DA9231606



Jassem, Z. A. (1988). Phonological Variation and Change in Immigrant Speech: A Sociolinguistic Study of a 1967 Arab-Israeli War Immigrant Speech Community in Damascus, Syria.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:245A

Jassem, A. Z. (1993). Impact of the Arab-Israeli Wars on Language and Social Change in the Arab World: The Case of Syrian Arabic. Kuala Lumpur, Malasia, Pustaka Antara.

Jassem, Z. A. (1994). Lectures in English and Arabic Sociolinguistics. Kuala Lumpur, Pustaka Antara.

Jassem, Z. A. (1994). Lectures in English and Arabic Sociolinguistics. Kuala Lumpur, Pustaka Antara.

Jastrow, O. and S. Kazzarah (1980). “Erinnerungen an die Osmanenzeit: Aleppinische Texte, I.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 93-117.

Jastrow, O. (1980). Das mesopotamische Arabisch. Handbuch der arabischen Dialekte. W. Fischer and O. Jastrow. Wiesbaden, Otto Harrassowitz: 140-154.

Jastrow, O. (1981). Die mesopotamisch-arabischen qeltu-Dialekte, Band II: Volkskundliche Texte in elf Dialekten.

Jastrow, O. (1982). “Lexikalische Nachtrage zu Behzani.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 9: 81-82.

Jastrow, O. (1983). “Beobachtungen zum arabischen Dialect von Adana (Turkei).” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 11: 72-79.

Jastrow, O. (1988). “On the Arabic Dialect of the Jews from Arbil.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 50-59.

Jaworski, A. (1985). “A ‘Macro Scale’Attitudes to the foreigner’s language.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 20: 135-40.

Jelinek, M. E. (1981). On Defining Categories : Aux and Predicate in Colloquial Egyptian Arabic, University of Arizona.

Jelinek, E. (1981). Person-subject marking in AUX in Egyptian Arabic. Linguistic Categories. R. Heny and B. Richards, University of Arizona. 1: 21-46.

Jelinek, E. (1983). Person-Subject Marking in AUX in Egyptian Arabic. Linguistic Categories: Auxiliaries and Related Puzzles, I: Categories; II: The Scope, Order, and Distribution of English Auxiliary Verbs. F. Heny and B. Richards. Dordrecht, Reidel: 21-46.

Jernudd, B. H. and W. Geoffrey M. (1983). “The concept of basic color terms: variability in Arabic.” Anthropological Linguistics 25(1): 61-81.

Jernudd, B. H. and M. H. Ibrahim (1986). “Issues in Arabic sociolinguistics.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1).

Jernudd, B. H. (1986). Language Mentions in Jordanian Newspapers (The English-Language Press). The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of Language. J. A. Fishman, A. Tabouret-Keller, M. Clyne, B. Krishnamurti and M. Abdulaziz. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 253-269.

Jernudd, B. H. and M. J. Shapiro, Eds. (1989). The Politics of Language Purism. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter.

Jibril, M. (1987). “Language in Nigerian Education.” Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics 13(1): 37-51.

Jobling, W. J. (1990). New North Arabian Epigraphic Evidence for the History of the Decipherment of the Alphabet. History and Historiography of Linguistics: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on the History of the Language Sciences. H.-J. Niederehe and K. Koerner. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xxv: 125-134.

Johnson, D. (1979). “Opaque stress in Palestinian.” Lingua 49: 153-67.

Johnson, C. D. (1982). “Vowel-consonant metathesis in a Palestinian dialect.” Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 17(1): 61-77.

Johnson, C. D. (1988). Levantine Cyclogenesis. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 143-66.



Johnson, C. D. (1988). “Preclusteral Shortening in Levantine Arabic.” Journal of Afroasiatic Languages 1(1): 1-25.

Johnson, C. D. (1990). Levantine Cyclogenesis. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 143-166.

Johnstone, T. M. (1980). “Gemination in the Jibbali Language of Dhofar.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 4: 61-71.

Johnstone, T. M. (1983). The System of Enumeration in the South Arabian Languages. Arts. Presented to R. B. Serjeant on the Occasion of His Retirement from Sir Thomas Adams's Chair of Arabic at the Univ. of Cambridge. Arabian and Islamic Studies. R. L. Bidwell and G. R. Smith. London, Longman: 225-228.

Johnstone, T. M. (1984). New Sibilant Phonemes in the Modern South Arabian Languages of Dhofar. Papers from 3rd International Hamito-Semitic Cong. Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics. J. Bynon. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xi: 389-390.

Johnstone, B. (1987). “Parataxis in Arabic: modification as a model for persuasion.” Studies in Language 11(1): 85-98.

Johnstone, B. (1990). 'Orality' and Discourse Structure in Modern Standard Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 215-233.

Johnstone, B. (1991). Repetition in Arabic Discourse: Paradigms, Syntagms, and the Ecology of Language. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Jones, S. (1983). “Arabic instruction and literacy in Javanese Muslim schools.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 42: 83-94.

Joseph, J. E. (1985). “Superposed languages and standardization.” Studi italiani di linguistica teorica e applicata 14(1-3): 35-52.

Jum'ah, K. A. a.-K. (1980). Shawahid al-shi'r fi Kitab Sibawayh. Kuwait, Maktabat Dar al-'Urubah.

Justice, D. B. (1981). The Semantics of Form in Arabic, in the Mirror of European Languages, University of California, Berkeley.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:5107A

Justice, D. (1987). The Semantics of Form in Arabic in the Mirror of European Languages. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Kahl, O. (1988). “Ibn al-Hanbali's Treatise on the Etymology of Arabic Insan.” Orientalia Lovaniensia Periodica 19: 197-208.

Kahl, O. (1989). “Eine jemenitische Drogenliste aus der zweiten Halfte des 19. Jahrhunderts.” Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies 57(3): 228-232.

Kahlil, A. (1989). “A Study of Cohesion and Coherence in Arab EFL College Students Writing.” DEpt English Bethlehem U, West Bank Jordan System 17(3): 359-371.

Kalmar, I. and D. Agius (1983). “Verb-Subject Order and Communicative Dynamism in Maltese.” Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 50(3): 335-354.

Kamel, G. W. (1989). Argumentative Writing by Arab Learners of English as a Foreign and Second Language: An Empirical Investigation of Contrastive Rhetoric, Indiana University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:677A

Kamprath, C. and M. Sorenson (1988). Computational analysis of Arabic morphology. 2nd International Conference of the Linguistic Society of Morocco, Rabat.

Kanakri, M. A. (1988). Style and Style Shifting in Educated Spoken Arabic of Jordan, University of Wisconsin-Madison.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:2202A

Kapeliuk, O. (1988). “Abstract Nouns as Transformation of Copula Sentences - Teh Case of Amharic.” Grazer Linguistische Studien 30(fall): 69-77.

Kaplan, T. (1993). Arabic Genitives: A Problematic Structure for the Binding Theory. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 195-208.



Karara, O. and L. Sherbini (1987). Sentence length as a random variable for some Arabic writers. 1987 Annual Conference of the Institute of Statistical Studies and Research, Cairo University.

Kardestuncer, A. E. (1982). “On the Role of Transition Duration in the Discrimination of Velar Stop Consonants in Turkish.” Word 33(3): 243-252.

Karp, L. A. (1992). Sahl b. Harun: The Man and His Contribution to Adab, Harvard University.DAI No. DA9220159

Kasem, C. (1987). Die Bildung des internen Plurals im Agyptisch-Arabischen als Teilaspekt des Spracherwerbs. Vienna, Diplomarbeit, Universitat Wien.

Kastner, H. (1981). Phonetik und Phonologie des modernen Hocharabisch. Leipzig, Enzyklopadie.

Kastner, H. (1987). “Die gepressten Konsonanten des Hocharabischen und ihre phonologische Interpretation.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 40(6): 814-817.

Kastner, H. (1989). “A Contrastive Comparison of Consonantal Phonemes of New High German and Modern High Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 125-130.

Kay, M. (1989). Two level morphology for Arabic. Arabic Morphology. A. Farghali and J. McCarthy.

Kaye, A. S. (1975). A Comparative Study of the Arabic Dialects Spoken in Nigeria. American Philosophical Society Yearbook, 1974. Philadelphia: 628-29.

Kaye, A. S. (1975). Linguistics Comments on the Papers from the 1970 London Colloquium on Hamito-Semitic Comparitive Linguistics. Hamito Semitica. J. Bynon and T. Bynon. The Hague and Paris, Mouton and Co.: 100-01, 131, 159, 246, 331, 486, 491, 518.

Kaye, A. s. (1975). Nigerian Arabic and Diachronic Linguistics. Ninth Mid-America Linguistics Conference: From Meaning to Sound, Univ. of Nebraska Press.

Kaye, A. S. (1977). The Arabic Dialects of East Africa. American Philosophical Society Yearbook, 1976. Philadelphia, American Philosophical Society: 363.

Kaye, A. S. (1977). The Consonantal System of the Semitic Languages. Dept. of Linguistics Seminar Papers Series. Fullerton, California State University. 40: vi, 75.

Kaye, A. S. (1982). A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic. Malibu, CA, Undena Publications.

Kaye, A. S. (1982). The Pressure of Syntactic Change on Morphology: a study of Semitic linguistics. Festschrift in Honor of Morton C. Fierman. J. Kalir. Fullerton, Dept. of Religious Studies, California State U.: 63-94.

Kaye, A. S. (1985). “Hebrew tiro(w)s = “psychoactive drug/opium; juice; sauce” A study in Worter & Sachen.” Diachronica 2(2): 267-73.

Kaye, A. S. (1985). “On the Importance of Pidgins and Creoles for Historical Linguistics.” Diachronica: International Journal for Historical Linguistics 2(2): 201-230.

Kaye, A. S. (1985). Some Notes on Arabic Dialectology and its Works. Studies in the Humanities: A Festschrift in Honor of Joseph Kalir. A. S. Kaye. Fullerton, California State University: 75-83.

Kaye, A. S. (1985). “Comments on Arabic Language Structure.” Language Monthly 34: 5.

Kaye, A. S. (1986). “Some remarks on proto-Semitic phonology.” Language Sciences 8(1(63)): 37-48.

Kaye, J., M. Echchaldi, et al. (1986). “Les formes verbales de l’ arabe marocain.” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 61-99.

Kaye, A. S. (1986). The Verb ‘See’ in Arabic dialects. The Fergusonian Impact: From Phonology to Society. J. Fishman and others. Berlin, New York, Amersterdam, Mouton de Gruyter. 1: 211-21.



Kaye, A. S. (1986). “The Diversity of Arabic Language with Remarks on Ki-Nubi Arabic Grammar and Vocabulary.” Forum 4(5): 20-21.

Kaye, A. S. (1986). “The etymology of “coffee”: the dark brew.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 106(3): 557-58.

Kaye, A. S. (1986). Nigerian Arabic-English Dictionary. Malibu, California, Undena Publications.

Kaye, A. S. (1986). “A study of aspect in Maltese.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 139-45.

Kaye, J., M. Echchaldi, et al. (1986). “The Verbal Forms of Moroccan Arabic.” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 61-99.

Kaye, A. S. (1987). “Comments on Arabic.” Verbatim 13(3): 14.

Kaye, A. S. (1987). Arabic. The World’s Major Languages. B. Comrie. Oxford, London, Oxford University Press, Croom Helm, Ltd: 664-85.

Kaye, A. S. (1987). “Ki-Nubi Etymologies.” Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 9(2): 157-159.

Kaye, A. S. (1989). A Comparative Etymological Dictionary of Three African Arabic Dialects on Computer. Second Conference on Arabic Computational Linguistics, Kuwait, Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research.

Kaye, A. S. (1989). “Arabic and Pima.” Occasional Publications of the Epigraphic Society 18: 16-17.

Kaye, A. S. (1989). “Arabic grammatical theory in the Middle Ages.” Historiographia Linguistica 16(3): 351-360.

Kaye, A. S. (1990). Some Historical Remarks on Juba Arabic and Ki-Nubi. XXXII International Congress for Asian and North African Studies, in press for 1990.

Kaye, A. S. (1990). The Arabic Language with Particular Reference to Saudi Arabian Dialects. London, Croom Helm, Ltd.Kegan Paul International.

Kaye, A. S. (1990). Introduction to Arabic of Aden: An Introduction by H. Feghali. Arabic of Aden. A. s. Kaye. Wheaton, MD, Dunwoody Press.

Kaye, A. S. (1990). “Topics in Arabic Pidginistics and Creolistics.” Journal of the American Oriental Society Essay Series.

Kaye, A. S. (1990). Arabic Phonology. Hindi-Urdu Phonology. T. Griffen and F. Peng. London, Cole T. Whurr, Ltd.

Kaye, J. (1990). “'Coda' Licensing.” Phonology 7(2): 301-330.

Kaye, A. S. (1991). “Does Ugaritic Go with Arabic in Semitic Genealogical Sub-Classification?” Folia Orientalia 28: 115-128.

Kaye, A. S. (1991). “The hamzat al-wasl in contemporary Modern Standard Arabic.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 111(3): 572-573.

Kaye, A. S. (1992). “Orthographic Variation in Arabic Loan Words.” English Today: The International Review of the English Language 8(2): 32-41.

Kayed, I. M. H. (1985). The Influence of Arabic Grammar on Edited and Non-Edited English Used by Arabs, University of Missouri-Columbia.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:522A

Kechaou, S. (1982). “Adjectives and Related Forms.” IBLA, Revue de l'Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis 45(1(149)): 149-157.

Kechaou, S. (1984). “The Boundaries between nouns and verbs.” Revue de l’Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis 47 (1984)(1(153)): 125-37.

Kechrida, H. M. (1984). “De la radicale R dans les racines triliteres arabes.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 215-230.



Keegan, J. M. (1984). “Geminate Clusters and Moroccan Syllable Structure.” CUNYForum: Papers in Linguistics 10: 44-69.

Keegan, J. M. (1986). The Role of Syllabic Structure in the Phonology of Moroccan Arabic. Current Approaches to African Linguistics, III. G. J. Dimmendaal. Dordrecht, Foris: 209-226.

Keegan, J. M. (1986). The phonology and morphology of Moroccan Arabic, City University of New York.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:3413A

Keith, R. W. (1987). “The effect of linguistic background on staggered spondaic work and dichotic consonant vowel scores.” British Journal of Audiology 21(1): 21-6.

Ken‘aan, S. A. R. (1989). “Word Stress in English and Arabic.” Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics 15(2): 1-22.

Kenny, D. (1992). Arab-Ameicans Learning Arabic: Motivation and Attitudes. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University press: 119-161.

Kenstowicz, M. and W. Wahba (1980). “Clitics and double object construction in Cairene Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 149-63.

Kenstowicz, M. and K. Abdul-Karim (1980). “Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 55-76.

Kenstowicz, M. (1980). “Notes on Cairene Arabic syncope.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 39-54.

Kenstowicz, M., Ed. (1980). Studies in Arabic Linguistics. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences. Urbana, University of Illinois.

Kenstowicz, M. and K. Abdul-Karim (1980). “Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 55-76.

Kenstowicz, M. (1981). “Vowel harmony in Palestinian Arabic: a suprasegmental analysis.” Linguistics 19(5-6(243-244)): 449-65.

Kenstowicz, M. (1981). A Note on Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic. Theoretical Issues in the Grammar of Semitic Languages. Cambridge, MA, MIT Dept. of Lingusitics. 3: 21-31.

Kenstowicz, M. (1983). Wh-In-Situ Constructions in Egyptian Arabic. Current Approaches to African Lingusitics. J. Kaye, H. Koopman and A. Dugas. Dordrecht, Foris. II: 261-281.

Kenstowicz, M. (1983). “Parametric variation and accent in the Arabic dialects.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 19: 205-13.

Kenstowicz, M. (1984). The null-subject parameter in modern Arabic dialects. In: Proceedings of N(orth) E(astern) L(inguistic) S(ociety), Amherst, Graduate Linguistics Student Assoc. U. of Massachusetts.

Kenstowicz, M. (1985). “On core syllables in modern Arabic dialects.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 168-72.

Kenstowicz, M. (1986). “Notes on syllable structure in three Arabic dialects.” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 101-108.

Kenstowicz, M. (1989). Null subject in Modern Arabic dialects. The Null Subject Parameter. O. Jaeggli and K. Safir: 263-275.

Kenstowicz , M. and M. Kidda (1987). The Obligatory Contour Principle and Tengale Phonology. Current Approaches to African Linguistics IV. D. Odden. Dordrecht, Foris. IV: 223-38.

Key, A. S. (1982). A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic. Malibu, CA, Undena.

Khafagy, M. T. (1979). “Efforts at Unifying Arabic Terminology.” Lebende Sprachen: Zeitschrift für Fremde Sprachen in Wissenschaft und Praxis 24: 131.

Khafian, U. (1986). “Nepriamoi vopros v aspekte russkogo i arabskogo rechevogo povedeniia.” Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom 4: 58-61.

Khaldieh, S. A. (1990). The Role of Phonological Encoding (Speech Recoding) and Visual Processes in Word Recognition of American Learners of Arabic as a Foreign Language, The Ohio State University.



Dissertation Abstracts International 51:4045A

Khalifa, R. (1988). Computer analysis of the Quran text. BRISMES: 1988 International Conference on Middle Eastern Studies, Leeds.

Khalil, A. (1985). “Communicative error evaluation: native speakers’ evaluation and interpretation of written errors of Arab EFL learnners.” TESOL Quarterly 19(2): 335-51.

Khalil, E. N. (1985). “News discourse: a strategy of recasting.” Journal of Pragmatics 9(5): 621-43.

Khan, G. (1989). “The Pronunciation of mh- before dages in the Medieval Tiberian Hebrew Reading Tradition.” Journal of Semitic Studies 34(2): 433-441.

Khan, G. (1990). “The Historical Development of the Structure of Medieval Arabic Petitions.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 53(1): 8-30.

Kharma, N. (1983). “A contrastive analysis of the use of verb forms in English and Arabic.” Studies in Descriptive Linguistics 10: 103-137.

Kharma, N. N. (1983). Contextualization and the Bilingual Learner's Dictionary. International Conference on Lexicography, Exeter, Niemeyer.

Khawam, R. R. (1988). “The Thousand and One Nights and the Creative Aspect of Language.” Le Langage et l'Homme 23(1 (66)): 66-70.

Kheshaifaty, H. M. J. (1989). The Grammatical Relations of Concord in the Makkan Dialect of Arabic: A Sociolinguistic Study, University of Reading (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 51:1597A

Khisham, A.-S. (1990). “Ofitsial'nye obrashcheniia v russkom i arabskom iazykakh.” Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom 4: 76-79.

Khrisat, A. (1991). “A note on English borrowings from Arabic.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 8.2: 21-28.

Khuri, F. I. (1981). Classification, Meaning, and Usage of Arabic Status and Kinship Terms. Festschrift for Ihsan 'Abbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. Studia Arabica et Islamica. W. Al-Qadi. Beirut, American University of Beirut. xv: 277-292.

Kilani-Schoch, M. (1984). “The Lexical Base in Classic and Tunesian Arabic.” Bulletin de la Section de Linguistique de la Faculte des Lettres de Lausanne 6: 147-161.

Kilani-Schoch, M. and W. U. Dressler (1986). “Metathese et conversion morphologiques en arabe tunisien.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschun 39(1): 61-75.

Kilani-Schoch, M. and W. Dressler (1986). Metathese im arabischen Dialekt von Tunis. Linguistics across Historical and Geographical Boundarids: In Honour of Jacek Fisiak on the Occasion of His Fiftieth Birthday, I: Linguistic Theory and Historical Linguistics; II: Descriptive, Contrastive and Applied Linguistics. D. Kastovsky and A. Szwedek. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter. xxiv: 947-961.

Kilani-Schoch, M. (1988). “Discontinuity or Continuity of the Morphological Basis in Classical Arabic and in Tunisian Arabic?” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 81-92.

Kilani-Schoch, M. (1988). “Discontinuite ou continuite de la base morphologique en arabe classique et en arabe tunisien?” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 19: 81-92.

Killean, C. G. (1970). Classical Arabic. Current Trends in Linguistics, VI: Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa. T. A. Sebeok and others. The Hague, Mouton. VI: 413-438.

Killean, C. G. (1980). “Demonstrative variation in oral media Arabic in Egypt.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 165-78.

Killean, C. G. (1984). “The Development of Western Grammars in Arabic.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 43(3): 223-230.

Kinberg, N. and F. Abu-Khadra (1987). “Causal and Adversative Meanings of the Particle lakin in Arabic.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 107(4): 761-765.



Kinberg, N. (1988). “Some Temporal, Aspectual, and Modal Features of the Arabic Structure la-qad + Prefix Tense Verb.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 108(2): 291-295.

Kinberg , N. (1987). “The Concepts of Elevation and Depression in Medieval Arabic Phonetic Theory.” Zeitschrift für ARabische Linguistik 17(1987): 7-20.

Kirk, G. (1979). Communication in Classical Islam. Propaganda and Communication in World History. H. D. Lasswell, D. Lerner and H. Speier. Honolulu, UP of Honolulu. 1: 348-380.

Kmetova, T. a. S., Lydia (1992). “Why Bother About Those Tenses?” Contrastive Linguistics 17(3): 45-57.

Knauf, E. A. (1984). “Zum Vordringen des Arabischen im Libanon vor dem Islam.” Die Welt des Orients: Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes 15: 119-122.

Knecht, P. (1987). “Toward Good Usage of Creolization.” Etudes Creoles 10(2): 159-166.

Koch, B. J. (1981). Repetition in Discourse: Cohesion and Persuasion in Arabic Argumentative Prose, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:•3983A

Koch, B. J. (1983). “Presentation as proof: the language of Arabic rhetoric.” Anthropological Linguistics 25(1): 47-60.

Koch, B. J. (1983). “Arabic lexical couplets and the evolution of synonymy.” General Linguistics 23(1): 51-61.

Koch, B. J. (1984). “Rhetorical Style in Arabic: an addendum to “The least you should know about Arabic”.” TESOL Quarterly 18(3): 542-45.

Koch, B. J., M. Thomas-Ruzic, et al. (1984). “Comments on Karyn Thompson-Panos and Maria Thomas-Ruzic's 'The Least You Should Know about Arabic: Implications for the ESL Writing Instructor': A Reader Reacts.” TESOL Quarterly 18(3): 542-547.

Koda, K. (1986). Cognitive processes in second language reading, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:3382A

Koda, K. (1988). “Cognitive Process in Second Language Reading: Transfer of L1 Reading Skills and Strategies.” Second Language Research 4(2): 133-156.

Koda, K. (1989). “Effects of L1 Orthographic Representation on L2 Phonological Coding Strategies.” Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 18(2): 201-222.

Kontzi, R. (1981). Gibt es reines Maltesisch? Europaische Mehrsprachigkeit: Festschrift zum 70. Geburtstag von Mario Wandruszka. W. Pockl. Tubingen, Niemeyer: 63-71.

Kontzi, R. (1982). Maltesisch: Sprachgeschichtliche und areallinguistische Aspekte. Die Leistung der Strataforschung und der Kreolistik: Typologische Aspekte der Sprachkontakte. P. S. Ureland. Tubingen, Niemeyer: 63-87.

Koplewitz, I. (1990). The Use and Integration of Hebrew Lexemes in Israeli Spoken Arabic. Fourth International Conference on Minority Languages. D. Gorter, J. F. Hoekstra, L. G. Jansma and J. Ytsma. Clevedon, UK, Multilingual Matters: 181-195.

Koplewitz, I. (1992). “Arabic in Israel: The Sociolinguistic Situation of Israel's Arab Minority.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 98: 29-66.

Kormos, C., E. D. Lawson, et al. (1992). “Most Common Surnames in Israel: Arabic and Jewish, I.” Onomastica Canadiana 74(1): 23-38.

Kouloughli, D.-E. (1982). “Traitement formel de l'arabe: Contributions a l'etude de la phrase nominale en arabe classique.” T. A. Informations: Revue Internationale du Traitement Automatique du Langage 23: 3-39.

Kouloughli, D. E. (1986). “On the Internal Structure of "Heavy" Syllables in Classical Arabic.” Revue quebecoise de linguistique 16(1): 129-155.

Kouloughli, D. E. (1986). “Sur la structure interne des syllabes 'lourdes' en arabe classique.” Revue Quebecoise de Linguistique 16(1): 129-



155.

Kouloughli, D. E. (1987). “Vers un traitement automatique de la predication verbale en arabe standard moderne.” T. A. Informations: Revue Internationale du Traitement Automatique du Langage 28(1): 23-45.

Kouloughli, D. (1988). “L'ordre des mots dans le syntagme nominal.” Relpred: Etudes sur l'ordre des mots, Collection ERA 642 (UA 04 1028) Université de Paris 7: 129-162.

Kraemer, R. and E. Olshtain (1989). “Perceived ethnolinguistic vitality and language attitutes: the Israeli setting.” Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 10(3): 197-212.

Krahl, G. (1986). “Arabic equivalents of german adjectival compositions (Die arabischen Aquivalente deutscher Adjektivkomposita).” Linguistiche Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte 148: 135-45.

Krasovitskaya, T. Y. (1979). “"The First Task Is Literacy".” Voprosy istorii 53(5): 107-120.

Krieg, L. J. (1980). Phonetic classification: the acoustic structure of strident fricatives, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:2087A

Krier, F. (1990). “Sprachen im arealen Kontakt.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 43(6): 797-804.

Kronholm, T. (1989). “Dedication and Devotion: The Introduction fo the Kitab al-Jalis a-Salih wa-lanis an-nasih, Ascribed to Sibt ibn al-Jawzi.” Orientalia Suecana (OS) 38-39(1989-1990): 81-91.

Kropfitsch, L. (1980). “Semantische Tendenzen im Neuhocharabischen.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 118-136.

Kropfitsch, L. (1981). “F. Corriente: Diccionario espanol-arabe. 1970; Diccionario arabe-espanol. 1977.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 75-80.

Krotkoff, G. (1989). “Majhura/Mahmusa Revisited.” Al-‘Arabiyya 22(1-2): 217-218.

Kugelmass, S. and A. Lieblich (1979). “Impact of Learning to Read on Directionality in Perception: A Further Cross-Cultural Analysis.” Human Development 22(6): 406-415.

Kuiryagawa, F., M. Sawashima, et al. (1986). “An Electromygraphic Study of the Emphatic Consonants in Standard Jordanian Arabic.” Annual Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics 20: 23-31.

Kunitzsch, P. (1987). “Namenkundliche Anmerkungen zu P. Bancourt, Les Musulmans….” Zeitschrift für Romanische Philologie 103(3-4): 257-70.

Kuriyagawa, F. (1983). “Tables of Arabic Words for Experimental Phonetics.” Annual Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics 17: 1-12.

Kuriyagawa, F. (1984). “The Features of /k/ and /q/ in Cairo Standard Arabic.” Annual Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics 18: 65-73.

Kuriyagawa, F., M. Sawashima, et al. (1988). “Electromyographic Study of Emphatic Consonants in Standard Jordanian Arabic.” Folia Phoniatrica: International Journal of Phoniatrics, Speech Therapy and Communication Pathology 40(3): 117-122.

Kusterer, H. (1990). “Hellfire Pass or the Desire to Find.” Lebende Sprachen 35(1): 9-10.

Kyamilev, S. K. (1979). “The Overlapping Means for Expressing Noun Declension and Verbal Mood in Arabic.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 28(1): 82-90.

Kyamilev, S. K. and G. P. Mel'nikov (1983). “The Problem of Minimal Sense-Distinctive and Significative Units in Semitic Languages.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 32(5): 87-96.

Labadi, A. (1990). A Contrastive Study of Gender in English and Arabic: Pedagogical and Sociolinguistic Implications, The University of



Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:1938A

Labarta, A. (1985). Algunos aspectos del dialecto arabe valenciano en el s.XVI a la luz del fondo de documentos del AHN. Actas de las II Jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 281-315.

Lahlou, M. (1991). A Morpho-Syntactic Study of Code-Switching between Moroccan Arabic and French, University of Texas at Austin.DAI No. DA9200661

Lakhdar-Barka, F. (1980). “The Gemination of the Causative Verb in Algerian Arabic.” Rev. des Langues 3: 89-103.

Lakshmanan, U. (1986). “The role of parametric variation in adult second language acquisition: a study of the “pro-drop” parameter.” Publications of the Modern Language Association 2(1): 97-118.

Landau, J. M. (1987). “Hebrew and Arabic in the state of Israel: political aspects of the language issue.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 67: 117-33.

Langer, M. (1989). “On Causal Constructions in the Strict Sense of the Term in Modern High Arabic.” Liguistische Studien 189: 40-53.

Langer, M. (1989). “Anmerkungen zur Anaphorik und Kataphorik der Partikel haitu im modernen Hocharabisch.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 42(6): 816-823.

Langhade, J. (1981). “Grammar, Logic, Linguistic Studies of al-Farabi.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 365-77.

Langhade, J. (1985). “Mentalite Grammairienne et Mentalite Logicienne au IVe Siecle.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 15: 104-117.

Larcher, P. (1985). “You Have Said "Delocutive"?” Languages 20(80): 99-124.

Larcher, P. and A. Girod (1990). “Passif grammatical, passif periphrastique et categorie d'auxiliaire en arabe classique moderne.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 37(2): 137-150.

Larcher, P. (1990). Elements pragmatiques dans la theorie grammaticale arabe post-classique. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 195-214.

Larcher, P. (1991). “Quand, en arabe, on parlait de l'arabe . . ., II: Essai sur la categorie de 'insa' (vs habar).” Arabica: Journal of Arabic and Islamic Studies 38(2): 246-273.

Larcher, P. and M. Plancade (1992). “La 'cote' n'est pas 'facile'...ou, les ecueils 'phonographiques' d'un apprentissage de l'arabe 'classique'.” Les Langues Modernes (LanM) 86(no. 3 1992): 41-48.

Larcher, P. (1992). “La Particule lakinna vue par un grammairien arabe due XIIIe siecle: Ou comment une description de detail s'inscrit dans une 'theorie pragmatique'.” International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences 19(no. 1 1992): 1-24.

Larcher, P. (1993). “Les Arabisants et la categorie de 'insa': Histoire d'une 'occultation'.” International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences 20(2-3): 259-282.

Lardiere, D. (1992). “On the Linguistic Shaping of Thought: Another Response to Alfred Bloom.” Language in Society 21(2): 231-251.

Laroui, R. K. (1984). “The relationship between native and foreign languages in Morocco.” Les sciences de l’education pour l’ere nouvelle(1-2): 173-82.

Latham, J. D. and B. C. Bloomfield (1980). Loanwords from the Arabic in the Latin translation of the Calendrier de Cordoue. Middle East Studies and Libraries: A Felicitation Volume for Prof. J.D. Pearson. London, Mansell: 103-13.

Latham, J. D. (1982). “New light on the scansion of an old Andalusian muwassah.” Journal of Semitic Studies 27(1): 61-75.

Laufer, A. and T. Baer (1988). “The Emphatic and Pharyngeal Sounds in Hebrew and in Arabic.” Language and Speech 31(2): 181-205.



Law, V. (1990). Indian Influence on Early Arab Phonetics-or Coincidence? Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II. K. Versteegh and M. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 10: 215-227.

Le Clezio, Y. (1990). “The Phonetic Impact of Arabic on Shilluk.” Speech, Hearing and Language 4: 257-271.

Lederman, S. (1982). “Problems in a prosodic analysis of Hebrew morphology.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 12(1): 141-63.

Leemhuis, F. (1982). “Qur’anic siggil and Aramaic sgyl.” Journal of Semitic Studies 27(1): 47-56.

Lentzner, K. R. (1981). “Semantic Motivation for Arabic Dative-Movement.” Al-‘Arabiyya 14: 19-23.

LeTourneau, M. S. (1993). Case-Making and Binding of Subject Clitics in Arabic Complement Clauses. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamis. V: 261-292.

Levin, A. (1985). “The Distinction between Nominal and Verbal Sentences According to the Arab Grammarians.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 15: 118-127.

Levin, A. (1987). “The particle la as a object marker in some Arabic dialects of the Galilee.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 31-40.

Levtzion, N. and J. F. P. Hopkins (1980). Arabic Reference and Grammar: Corpus of Arabic Sources for West African History. New York, Cambrige Univ. Press.

Lewis, B. (1980). “Translation from Arabic.” Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 124(1): 41-47.

Li, C. and S. Thompson (1977). Mechanisms for the development of copula morphemes. Mechanisms for Syntactic Change. C. Li. Austin, University of Texas Press: 419-444.

Liebman, J. D. (1992). “Toward a New Contrastive Rhetoric: Differences between Arabic and Japanese Rhetorical Instruction.” Journal of Second Language Writing 1(no. 2): 141-165.

Lindau, M., K. Norlin, et al. (1985). “Cross-Linguistic Differences in Diphthongs.” UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics 61: 40-44.

Lindau, M., K. Norlin, et al. (1990). “Some Cross-Linguistic Differences in Diphthongs.” Journal of the International Phonetic Association 20(1): 10-14.

Lindemann, M. (1987). “The Description of Spanish Words in the First Spanish-Latin Dictionary.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philogie 103(5-6): 500-506.

List, H. (1987). “Notes on the designation of tent, clothing, and cooking utensils for Near East bedouins (Notizen zu den Bezeichnungen von Zelt, Kleidung und Kochgeschirr bei nahostlichen Beduinen).” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 69-90.

Lodhi, A. Y. (1984). “The Status of Arabic in East Africa.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 257-262.

Loi Corvetto, I. (1982). “L'intonazione nell'arabo siriano.” Lingua e Stile: Trimestrale di Linguistica e Critica Letteraria 17.

Lokkegaard, F. (1984). “'Asre ha-'is: A Morphological and Etymological Essay.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 263-268.

Lokkegaard, F. (1987). “Sectio as a Transitory Loanword in Arabic Administration.” Acta Orientalia 48: 7-14.

Lope Blanch, J. M. (1984). “Depronominalization of the Relatives.” Hispanic Linguistics 1(2): 257-272.

Lopez-Morilla, C. (1994). Aljamiado and the Moriscos' Islamicization of Spanish. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 17-23.

Lorch, M. P. and P. Meara (1989). “How people listen to languages they don't know.” Language Sciences 11(4): 343-353.

Lori, A. A. (1990). Self-Concept, Tolerance of Ambiguity, English Achievement, Arabic Achievement and Overall School Achievement as Factors Contributing to Bahraini High School Seniors' Attitudes toward Learning English as a Foreign Language, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:2298A



Lory, P. (1988). “A Few Remarks on the Expression of Time, Space, and the Human Body in Literary Arabic.” Revue de Phonetique Appliquee 87-89: 173-176.

Lundin, A. G. (1980). “Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives in Semitic Languages.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 29(3): 118-122.

M'Barek, M. N. and D. Sankoff (1988). “Arabic/French Mixed Discourse: Borrowing or Code-Switching?” The Canadian Journal of Linguistics 33(2): 143-154.

M'Barek, M. N. and D. Sankoff (1988). “Le Discours mixte arabe/francais: Emprunts ou alternances de langue?” Canadian Journal of Linguistics 33(2): 143-154.

Ma’ayergi, H. A. (1986). “History of translations of the meanings of the Holy Qu’ran into the Polish language.” Journal-Institute of Muslim Minority Affairs 7(2): 538-46.

Macdonald, M. C. A. (1991). “HU 501 and the Use of s3 in Taymanite.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 36(1): 11-36.

Macdonald, M. C. (1992). “On the Placing of S in the Maghribi Abjad and the Khirbet al-Samra' ABC.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 37(no. 2): 155-166.

Machozi, T. (1989). “Le Parler kiswahili de Kisangani.” Annales Aequatoria 10: 141-152.

Macmillan, E. G. (1985). Priorities underlying the evolution of an Arabic short vowel system: Cantineau’s Rweli idiolects as exponents of the chronological ordering of linguistic shifts, Princeton University.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3019A

Macmillan, E. G. (1985). Priorities Underlying the Evolution of an Arabic Short Vowel System: Cantineau's Rweli Idiolects as Exponents of the Chronological Ordering of Linguistic Shifts, Princeton University.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3019A

Mahadin, R. S. (1982). The Morphophonemics of the Standard Arabic Triconsonantal Verbs, University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:789A

Mahadin, R. S. (1989). “Doublets in Arabic: Notes towards a Diachronic Phonological Study.” Language Sciences 11(1): 1-25.

Maher, M. (1979). “Administrative and Business Languages of the World.” Lebende Sprachen 24(3): 126-131.

Maher, M. (1979). “Das moderne Arabisch.” Lebende Sprachen: Zeitschrift für Fremde Sprachen in Wissenschaft und Praxis 24: 126-131.

Mahmoud, Y. (1979). The Arabic Writing System and the Sociolinguistics of Orthographic Reform, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 40:4574A

Mahmoud, Y. (1980). “On the Reform of the Arabic Writing System.” Journal of Reading 23(8): 727-729.

Mahmoud, S. M. (1980). Terms of status in colloquial Cairene Arabic: a study in educational linguistics, University of Illinois at urbana-Champaign.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:572A

Mahmoud, Y. (1981). “The Arabic Writing System and Deliberate Orthographic Change.” Al-‘Arabiyya 14: 79-84.

Mahmoud, Y. (1982). “Towards a functional Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 15(1-2): 82-89.

Mahmoud, N. C. (1985). “Landmarks in Arabic.” Verbatim 12(2): 2.

Mahmoud, A. T. (1986). Passivization: Lexical vs Syntactic Treatment. Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL). Columbus, Ohio State University. 3: 369-379.

Mahmoud, Y. (1986). Arabic after Diglossia. The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of Language. J. A. Fishman, A. Tabouret-Keller, M. Clyne, B. Krishnamurti



and M. Abdulaziz. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 239-251.

Mahmoud, A. T. (1986). Passivization: Lexical vs. Syntactic Treatment. The Third Eastern States Conference on Linguistics, University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA, Ohio State University Press.

Mahmoud, A. T. (1989). A Comparative Study of Middle and Inchoative Alternations in Arabic and English, University of Pittsburgh.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3571

Mahmoud, A. T. (1991). A Contrastive Study of Middle and Unaccusative Constructions in Arabic and English. Perspective son Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 119-134.

Mahmud, U. A. (1979). Variation and change in the aspectual system of Juba Arabic, Georgetown University.

Mahmud, U. A. (1980). Linguistic Change and Variation in the Aspectual System of Juba Arabic, Georgetown University.

Mahmud, U. (1982). Language Spread as a wavelike Diffusion Process: Arabic in the Southern Sudan. Language Spread: Studies in Diffusio and Social Change. R. Cooper. Bloomington, IN, Indiana UP, Center for Applied Linguistics. vii: 158-183.

Mairi, L. (1983). “The number marking system of Algiers Arabic.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 11: 48-71.

Mairi, L. (1987). “A Bibliography of Algerian Arabic Linguistics.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 96-107.

Majdi, B. B. (1988). Iraqi Arabic Morphophonemics, University of Connecticut.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:377A

Majdi, B. (1990). Word Order and Proper Government in Classical Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 127-153.

Majdi, B. and M. Winston (1993). Gemination and Antigemination in Iraqi. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 163-194.

Majdi, B. and M. Winston (1994). Rules of Phonology: Pre- or Post-Syllable Structure? Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 185-214.

Makki, E. M. (1983). The Lebanese dialect of Arabic: Southern Region, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 44:3050A

Malina, R. (1987). Zum schriftlichen Gebrauch des kairinischen Dialekts anhand ausgewählter Texte von Sacdaddiin Wahba. Berlin, Klaus Schwarz Verlag.

Malkiel, Y. (1983). “Some Second and Third Thoughts on Luso-Hispanic almuerzo/almoco 'Lunch', with Special Attention to Older Sp. yantar/Ptg. jantar 'Dinner'.” Romance Philology 36(3): 393-403.

Mangion, G. (1985). “25: Malta.” Rivista Italiana di Dialettologia: Lingue Dialetti Societa 9: 369-381.

Mangion, G. (1990). “25: Malta.” Rivista Italiana di Dialettologia: Lingue Dialetti Societa 4: 257-266.

Mansour, J. (1985). “The particle baqa in the Judaeo-Arabic dialect of Baghdad.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 14: 62-75.

Mansour, J. (1988). “Vowel Distribution in the Judaeo-Arabic Dialect of Baghdad.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 19: 60-73.

Marcos-Marin, F. (1981). Glosas romanicas a una gramatica del haz dialectal hispano-arabe. Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica. Madrid, Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 109-113.

Marlow, L. (1986). “A translation from the Hilyat al-Awliya’ Wa-Tabaqat al-Asfiya by Abu Nucaym al-Isfahani: the life of Hatim al-Asamm.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 29-46.

Marshad, H. A. and S. M. Suleiman (1991). “A Comparative Study of Swahili ni and Arabic kana as Copulative Elements.” Language Sciences 13(1): 21-37.



Martin, D. (1983). “An account of Ruwayn B. Ahmad from Al-Sulami’s Tabaqat Al-Sufiyya.” Al-‘Arabiyya 16(1-2): 27-55.

Martin, C. B. (1987). “New International Names on the Campus.” Names 35(2): 86-94.

Martine, V., D. Caubet, et al. (1989). Genre et Accord dans Quelques Dialectes Arabes. Genre et Language. E. Koskas and D. Leeman. Paris. X: 39-66.

Martinez Ruiz, J. (1990). “Los laqab de oficio en la Granada morisca y en la tradicion andalusi.” Al- Qantara: Revista de Estudios Arabes 11(2): 343-365.

Martins, M. D. (1989). “Catalan, a romanistic problem.” Alfa 33: 171-178.

Masson, M. (1980). “Borrowing and ideology in Modern Hebrew.” Cahiers de l’Institut de Linguistique de Louvain 6(1-2): 77-91.

Masson, M. (1986). “KUBOS: A Greek word of Semitic origin? (Kubos: un mot grec d’origine semitique?).” La Linguistique 22(2): 143-8.

Mattar, H. E. (1989). A Cross-Sectional Error Analysis Study of the Common Writing Errors Made by Adult Arabic-Speaking EFL Learners in Bahrain, University of East Anglia (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3171A

Maury-Rouan, C. (1980). Les Langues du Monde: Diversite et Ressemblances. Linguistique. F. Francois. Paris, PU de France: 363-420.

May, J. (1980). The Perception of Egyptian Fricatives, University of Connecticut.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:658A

May, J. G. (1980). “Acoustic factors that may contribute to categorical perception.” Haskins Laboratories Status Report on Speech Research 63-64: 333-347.

May, J. G. (1981). “Acoustic factors that may contribute to categorical perception.” Language and Speech 24(3): 273-284.

McCarthy, J. (1979). Formal Problems in Semitic Phonology and Morphology, MIT.

McCarthy, J. (1979). “On Stress and Syllabification.” Linguistic Inquiry 10(3): 443-465.

McCarthy, J. J. (1980). “A note on the accentuation of Damascene Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 77-98.

McCarthy, J. (1981). “A prosodic theory of nonconcatenative morphology.” Linguistic Inquiry 12(3): 373-418.

McCarthy, J. (1982). Prosodic templates, morphemic templates and morphemic tiers. The Structure of Phonological Representations. H. van der Hulst and N. Smith. 1: 191-223.

McCarthy, J. (1983). A Prosodic Account of Arabic Broken Plurals. Current Trends in African Linguistics. I. R. Dihoff. Dordrecht, Foris. 1.

McCarthy, J. J. (1983). A Prosodic Account of Arabic Broken Plurals. Selection of Papers Read at 11th Annual Conf. on Afr. Ling., Apr. 10-12,1980, Boston University. Current Approaches to African Linguistics, I. I. R. Dihoff. Dordrecht, Foris: 289-320.

McCarthy, J. (1986). “OCP Effects: Gemination and Antigemination.” Linguistic Inquiry 17(2): 207-263.

McCarthy, J. and A. Prince (1988). “The Prosodic Morphology of Arabic Broken Plurals.” .

McCarthy, J. and A. Prince (1988). Prosodic morphology and templatic morphology. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 1-54.

McCarthy, J. (1989). “Gutteral Phonolgoy.” .

McCarthy, J. J. (1990). “Foot and Word in Prosodic Morphology: The Arabic Broken Plural.” Natural Language & Linguistic Theory 8(2): 209-283.



McCarthy, J. (1990). Prosodic Morphology and Templatic Morphology. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 1-54.

McCarthy, J. J. (1991). Semitic Gutturals and Distinctive Feature Theory. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. EId. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 63-91.

McCarus, E. and R. Rammuny (1968). “Word Count of Elementary Modern Literary Arabic Textbooks.” Studies in Language and Language Behavior 7(1968): 2-180.

McCarus, E. N. (1983). “Identifying the meters of Arabic poetry.” Al-‘Arabiyya 16(1-2): 57-83.

McCarus, E. N. (1987). “The Study of Arabic in the United States: A History of Its Development.” Al-‘Arabiyya 20(1-2): 13-27.

McClellan, J. (1981). “Two interpreters.” Word ways 14(1): 26-8.

Mdibeh, A. (1987). “Fertilisation ou integration.” Meta 32(3): 278-84.

Mehdi, M. F. (1981). The Interference of Arabic in the Use of English Prepositions, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:158A

Meiseles, G. (1980). “Educated spoken Arabic and the Arabic language continuum.” Archivum Linguisticum 11(2): 118-48.

Meiseles, G. (1981). “Hybrid versus symbiotic construction: a case study of comtemporary Arabic.” Linguistics 19: 11-12(249-250) 1077-93.

Melouk, M. (1989). The Acquisition of Modal Auxiliaries in English as a Foreign Language: The Case of Moroccan Learners, University of Lancaster (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 52:1311A

Memmedova, S. (1984). “Nouns Used Only in Plural in Modern Literary Arabic.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i iskusstvo 1: 102-105.

Memmedova, S. E. (1986). “Dual Plural of Nouns in Contemporary Literary Arabic.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i isskusstvo 4: 70-72.

Menacere, M. (1992). “Arabic Metaphor and Idiom in Translation.” Meta: Journal des TRaducteurs/Translators' Journal 37(no. 3, 1992 Sept.): 567-572.

Menocal, M. R. (1982). “The etymology of old Provencal trobar, trobador: a return to the “Third Solution”.” Romance Philology 36(2): 137-53.

Meshadijev, G. (1982). “Etymological analysis of some Azerbaijani paleotoponyms.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i iskusstov 1: 72-6.

Messiha, G. Z. (1985). “Some phonological problems that face Arab learners of English.” Studies in African Linguistics(supplement 9): 224-7.

Meyer-Hermann, R. (1988). “?Se debe la posposicion del sujeto en el espanol a una influencia arabe?” Revista de Filologia Espanola 68(1-2): 67-96.

Mezei, R. (1989). “Somali Language and Literacy.” Language Problems and Language Planning 13(3): 211-223.

Meziani, A. (1989). “A Pedagogical Sketch of Tense Usage in Moroccan Arabic.” Faculte Sciences Education 27(3): 240-244.

Michel, X. (1984). “L'Arabe au sud du Sahara.” Franzosisch Heute 15(2): 143-162.

Michel, A. J. (1988). A Case Study of the Composing Processes of Advanced Spanish, Chinese, and Arabic ESL Writers, University of Kansas.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:3252A



Mikdadi, M. F. A. (1985). An investigation of oral reading miscues generated by bilingual college students reading expository materials in Arabic and English, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3667A

Mikhailova, S. (1980). “Article use in Bulgarian and Arabic-A contrastive study.” Contrastive Linguistics 5(2): 30-5.

Mikhailova, S. (1980). “Chlenuvaneto v bulgarskiia i arabskiia ezik: Niakoi osobenosti i supostavki.” Sapostavitelno Ezikoznanie/Sopostavitel'noe Jazykoznanie/Contrastive Linguistics 5(2): 30-35.

Mikitenko, E. O. (1981). “Problems of Arab syntax in A. Yu. Krims’kii’s research.” Movoznavstvo 15(5(89)): 80-3.

Miled, M. (1987). “Evaluation of an Evolution.” Le Francais dans le Monde 27(supplement 2): 46-8.

Miller, M. E. (1981). Interlanguage Simplification and Metropolitanization, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3139-A

Miller, M. (1984). “On the Perception of Rhythm.” Journal of Phonetics 12(1): 75-83.

Miller, C. (1985). “The Stakes in the Arabization of Southern Sudan.” Mediterranean Peoples 33(Oct-Dec): 43-53.

Miller, A. M. (1986). “Loss of nominal case endings in the modern Arabic sedentary dialects.” Ohio State University Working Papers in Linguistics 34: 56-83.

Miller, A. M. (1986). “The origin of the modern Arabic sedentary dialects: an evaluation of several theories.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 47-74.

Miller, A. M. (1987). “Phonetic Characteristics of Levantine Arabic Geminates with Differing Morpheme and Syllable Structures.” Ohio State University Working Papers in Linguistics 36: 120-140.

Miller, C. (1987). Analyse des usages de l'arabe dans une communaute non arabophone: Le Cas du tribunal coutumier de Juba. Actes du VIe Colloque internat. "Acquisition d'une langue etrangere: Perspective et recherches". S'approprier une langue etrangere. H. Blanc, M. Le Douaron and D. Veronique. Paris, Didier: 295-306.

Miller, A. M. (1987). Morphological Idiosyncrasies in Classical Arabic: Evidence Favoring Lexical Representations Over Rules. Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL). F. Marshall, A. M. Miller and Z.-S. Zhang. Columbus, Ohio State University Press. 3: 393-404.

Mir Alam, Y. (1983). The Arabic Lexicon: Statistical Study of the Role of the Consonants in Arabic Roots. Damascus, University.

Mir Alam, Y. (1988). “Morphological analysis of the Arabic langauge system.” Institut Régional des Sciences de l'Informatique et des Télécommunications: Proceedings 2: 12-53.

Mitchell, T. F. (1980). “Dimensions of style in a grammar of educated spoken Arabic.” Archivum Linguisticum 11(2): 89-106.

Mitchell, T. (1981). “The Phonology of Weak Verbs: A Simple Diagram of Rules.” Al-‘Arabiyya 14: 11-18.

Mitchell, T. F. (1982). More than a matter of "writing with the learned, pronouncing with the vulgar" some preliminary observations on the Arabic Koine. Standard Languages: Spoken and Written. Manchester, Totowa: X, Manchester University Press; Barnes & Noble: 123-55.

Mitchell, T. F. (1984). Soziolinguistische und stilistische Aspekte des gesprochenen Arabisch der Gebildeten (Educated Spoken Arabic) in Agypten und der Levante. Berlin, Akademie.

Mitchell, T. F. (1985). Sociolinguistic and stylistic dimensions of the educated spoken Arabic of Egypt and the Levant. Language Standards and Their Codification: Process and Application. Exeter, University of Exeter: 42-57.

Mitchell, T. F. (1986). “What is educated spoken Arabic?” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 61: 7-32.

Mitchell, T. F. and S. El-Hassan (1994). Modality, Mood and Aspect in Spoken Arabic: With Special Reference to Egypt and the Levant. New York, Kegan Paul International.



Mitleb, F. M. (1981). Segmental and Non-Segmental Structure in Phonetics: Evidence from Foreign Accent, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3584A

Mitleb, F. M. (1984). “Voicing effect on vowel duration is not an absolute universal.” Journal of Phonetics 12(1): 23-7.

Mitleb, F. M. (1984). “Vowel length contrast in Arabic and English: a spectrographic test.” Journal of Phonetics 12(3): 229-35.

Mitleb, F. (1985). “Intelligibility of English “voicing” produced by Arabs.” Journal of Phonetics 13(2): 117-22.

Mitleb, F. (1987). “The effect of training on the identification of English consonants by Arabs.” Arab Journal for Humanities 27(7): 290-300.

Mitleb, F. (1992). “Some Aspects of Arabic Duration.” Journal of the International Phonetic Association 22(1-2): 27-34.

Mkrtc’yan, N. (1980). “Araberen p’oxarut’yunner Hayerenum (naz k’an arabneri arsavank’e Hayastan).” HSS Git. Akademiayi Lraber, Armenian S.S.R., U.S.S.R. 447: 49-64.

Mobaidin, H. E. Z. (1989). Tense and Aspect Transfer Errors: A New Analysis of Transfer Errors in English Compositions of Jordanian University Students.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:432A

Moftah, A. and P. Roach (1988). “Language Recognition from Distorted Speech: Comparison of Techniques.” Journal of the International Phonetic Association 18(1): 50-52.

Mohamed, F. A. H. (1989). Arabic-English Code-Switching in the Speech of an Egyptian Child, University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2037A

Mohamed, A. M. (1992). A Handbook of Phoenician in the Arabic Language, New York University.

Mohammad, M. D. (1983). The Semantics of Tense and Aspect in English and Modern Standard Arabic.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:2984A

Mohammad, M. A. (1985). Subject Extraction in Arabic. West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics,. J. Goldberg, S. MacKay and M. T. Wescoat. Stanford, Stanford U. Dept. of Linguistics. 4: 220-227.

Mohammad, M. A. (1988). Nominative Case, I-Subjects, and Agreement. Papers from the Parasession on Agreement. Chicago, Chicago Linguistic Society.

Mohammad, M. A.-L. (1989). The Sentential Structure of Arabic, University of Southern California.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:154A

Mohammad, M. A. (1990). The Problem of Subject-Verb Agreement in Arabic: Towards a Solution. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 95-125.

Mohammad , M. A. (1985). “Stylistic rules in classical Arabic and the levels of grammar.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 228-32.

Molina Rueda, B. (1988). “Contribucion de la Union de Academias Linguisticas Arabes a la facilitacion de la gramatica.” Miscelanea de Estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. FilologiaHebrea, Biblia y Judaismo 37(1): 169-181.

Molino, J., F. Soublin, et al. (1979). “Presentation: Metaphor Problems.” Languages 12(54): 5-40.

Mondejar, J. (1982). “Congrio and Zafio: A chapter on Mediterranean and Atlantic ichthyonymy.” Vox Romanica 41: 206-19.

Monroe, J. T. (1970). Islam and Arabs in Spanish Scholarship. Leiden, E. J. Brill.

Monroe, J. (1994). Elements of Romance Prosody in the Poetry of Ibn Quzman. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 63-87.



Moore, J. (1979). “Arabic Derivational Morphology and Lexical Theory.” Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society 15: 228-243.

Moore, J. (1987). “Word Order and Case Assignment in Modern Standard Arabic.” CLS 23: Papers from 23rd Annual Regional Meeting of Chicago Linguistic Society 23(1): 283-294.

Moore, J. (1990). Doubled Verbs in Modern Standard Arabic. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 55-93.

Morag, S. (1992). The Structure of Semantic and Associative Fields in Biblical Hebrew and Classical Arabic. 'Sha'arei Talmon': Studies in the Bible, Qumran, and the Ancient Near East Presented to Shemaryahu Talmon. M. Fishbane and E. Tov. Winona Lake, IN, Eisenbrauns: 165.

Morales, A. (1987). “Sobre los pronombres personales, I.” Miscelanea de Estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. Filologia Hebrea, Biblia y Judaismo 36(1): 349-366.

Morsly, D. (1985). “National Language: The Power of Words-Power Through Words.” Mediterranean Peoples 33(Oct-Dec): 79-88.

Morsly, D. and M. i. Algeria (1986). Multilingualism in Algeria. The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of Language. J. A. Fishman, A. Tabouret-Keller, M. Clyne, B. Krishnamurti and M. Abdulaziz. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 253-263.

Mortimer, M. (1988). “Language and Space in the Fiction of Assia Djebar and Leila Sebbar.” Research in African Literatures 19(3): 301-311.

Mostert, F. J. A. (1990). “A concise history of writing: a Synopsis.” Van Taal tot Taal 34(1): 30-42.

Mouakket, A. (1986). Linguistics and Translation: Some Semantic Problems in Arabic-English Translation, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2565A

Mourelle de Lema, M. (1982). “El valenciano, lengua autoctona.” Thesaurus 37(2): 255-67.

Mourelle de Lema, M. (1982). “Valencian, an Autochthonous Language.” Vox Romanica 41: 206-219.

Moussa, A. (1971). Statistical study of Arabic roots in Mu‘jam al-Sehah, Kuwait Unviersity.

Moussa, A. (1972). Statistical study of Arabic roots in Mu‘jam Lisan al-Arab, Kuwait University.

Moussa, A. and A. Shaheen (1973). Statistical study of Arabic roots in Mu‘jam Taj al-‘Araous, Kuwait University.

Moussa, A. (1985). “Occurrence probability of characters and entropy of Arabic language.” Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Informatics SP: 30-34.

Moustafa, M. H. (1979). “Perception Analysis.” The Modern Language Journal 63(8): 435-441.

Moutaouakil, A. (1984). ““Focalization” in Arabic: Toward a funtional analysis.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 64(2-3): 115-76.

Moutaouakil, A. (1985). Topic in Arabic: Towards a Functional Anaysis. Syntax and Pragmatics in Functional Grammar. M. Bolkestein., C. d. Groot and J. L. Mackenzie. Providence, RI, Foris Publications.

Moutaouakil, A. (1987). Pragmatic Functions in Functional Grammar of Arabic. Providence, RI, Foris Publications.

Moutaouakil, A. (1990). La Notcion d'actes de langage dans la pensee linguistique arabe ancienne. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar. STudies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. II: 229-238.

Mrayati, M. (1985). Statistical studies in Arabic linguistics. Arab School on Science and Technology, Zabadani, Syria.



Mrayati, M. (1990). Statistical Studies in Arabic Linguistics. Computers and the Arabic Language. P. A. MacKay. New York, Hemisphere. xii: 190-200.

Mukattash, L. (1981). “Problems in Error Analysis.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 13: 261-274.

Mukattash, L. (1984). “Errors Made by Arab University Students in the Use of English Prepositions.” Glottodidactica: An International Journal of Applied Linguistics 17: 47-64.

Mukattash, L. (1985). “Errors made by Arab university students in the use of English prepositions.” Glottodidactica 17: 47-64.

Mulder, J. W. F. (1987). “Effective methodology and effective phonological description.” La Linguistique 23(2): 19-42.

Muller, H. (1979). “Die modernen Schriftsprachen der westlichen islamischen Welt: Arabisch, Persisch und Turkisch.” Die Neueren Sprachen 78: 181-193.

Muller, K. (1980). 'Dawalig' oder 'dawalih'? Anmerkungen zu einem Versfragment. Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 114-122.

Muller, W. W. (1981). “Some words for Cat in Semitic.” Munchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 40: 139-41.

Muller, W. W. (1983). Athiopische Marginalglossen zum sabaischen Worterbuch. Ethiopian Studies: Dedicated to Wolf Leslau on the Occasion of His Seventy-Fifth Birthday, November 14th, 1981 by Friends and Colleagues. S. Segert, A. J. E. Bodrogligeti, M. S. Devenset al. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 275-285.

Munro, M. J. (1992). Perception and Production of English Vowels by Native Speakers of Arabic, University of Alberta, Canada.Dissertation Abstracts International 53:4301A

Munro, M. J. (1993). “Productions of English Vowels by Native Speakers of Arabic: Acoustic Measurements and Accentedness Ratings.” Language and Speech 36(1): 39-66.

Munzel, K. (1982). “Die zusammengesetzte Verbalform kunt i'mil in Kairener Arabisch: Versuch einer Erklarung.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 7: 76-78.

Musa, M. (1989). Purism and Correctness in the Bengali Speech Community. The Politics of Language Purism. B. H. Jernudd and M. J. Shapiro. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter: 105-112.

Mushira, E. and C. Holes, Eds. (1993). Perspecitves on Arabic Linguistics V. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Mustafa, Z. A. (1987). The Relative Gravity of the Different Types of Lexical Errors in Second Language Learning: An Empirical Study, State University of New York at Stony Brook.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:495A

Mykytenko, I. O. (1981). “Pytannia arabs'koho syntaksysu v doslidzhenniakh A. Iu. Kryms'koho.” Movoznavstvo: Naukovo-Teoretychnyi Zhurnal Viddilennia Literatury, Movy i Mystetstvoznavstva Akademii Nauk Ukr 5(Sept.-Oct.): 80-83.

Nahhas, M. (1981). Madkhal ila dirasat al-sarf al-'arabi 'ala daw' al-dirasat al-lughawiyah al-mu'asirah.

Nahmoud, N. C. (1985). “Landmarks in Arabic.” Verbatim 12(2): 2.

Naiki, R. (1986). “The Origins of the Name of God and Basmalah.” Area and Culture Studies 36: 45-60.

Naim-Sanbar, S. (1985). “Contacts of Usages and the Strategy of Communication-Beirut.” Mediterranean Peoples 33(Oct-Dec): 55-63.

Nakshabandi, A. M. H. (1981). A Descriptive Study of the Phonology and Morphology of the Abha Dialect, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:939A

Napitupulu, W. P. (1982). “Each one teach ten: literacy in Indonesia.” Prospects 12(2): 213-20.



Nasr, M. (1982). Analyse par champs semantiques et traductions du vocabulaire national: Le Cas du discours nasserien. Actes du 2e Colloque de lexicologie politique. D. Bonnaud-Lamotte. Paris, Klincksieck: 783-784.

Nassar, H. (1981). Dirasat lughawiyah. Beirut, Dar al-Ra'id al-'Arabi.

Natsopoulos , D. (1987). “Processing implications and presuppositions by schoolchildren and adults: a developmental cross-linguistic comparison.” Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 16(2): 133-64.

Nebes, N. (1982). “In al-muxuffafa und al-lam al-fariqa I.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 7: 7-22.

Nebes, N. (1982). Funktionsanalyse von 'kaana yaf‘alu. Hilesheim, Georg Olms.

Nebes, N. (1982). “In al-muxaffafa und al-lam al-fariqa.” Zeitschrift für Arabische LInguistik 7: 7-22.

Nebes, N. (1985). “In al-muxaffafa und al-lam al-fariqa II.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 14: 7-44.

Nebes, N. (1987). “In al-muxaffafa und al-lam al-fariqa III.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 7-30.

Nelde, P. H. (1986). “German as a Minority Language-The Comparability of Linguistic Contacts.” Deutsche Sprache in Europa und Ubersee 11: 251-273.

Ni Dheirg, I. (1988). “Gneithe de Phleanail Teanga ins na Tiortha Arabacha.” Teangeolas 25: 15-18.

Nir, R. (1984). “Linguistic and Sociolinguistic Problems in the Translation of Imported TV Films in Israel.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 48: 81-97.

Noor, H. H. (1993). “The Acquisition of Temporal Conjunctions by Saudi Arabian Learners of English.” International Journal of Applied Linguistics 3(1): 101-124.

Norlin, K. (1983). “Acoustic Analysis of Fricatives in Cairo Arabic.” Working Papers 25: 113-137.

Norlin, K. (1984). “Acoustic Analysis of Vowels and Diphthongs in Cairo Arabic.” Working Papers 27: 185-208.

Norlin, K. (1985). “Acoustic Analysis of Vowels and Diphthongs in Cairo Arabic.” Studies in African Linguistics 9(Dec): 238-244.

Norlin, K. (1985). “Pharyngalization in Cairo Arabic.” Working Papers 28: 139-150.

Norlin, K. (1989). “A Preliminary Description of Cairo Arabic Intonation of Statements and Questions.” Speech Transmission Laboratory Quarterly Progress and Status Report 1(Jan-Mar): 47-49.

Nowak, U. (1989). “On the Relationship Between Language and Memory in Foreign-Language Acquisition - An Empirical Study.” Deutsch als Fremdsprache 26(1): 15-20.

Nunez Cedeno, R. A. (1989). CV Phonology and Its Impact on Describing American Spanish Pronunciation. American Spanish Pronunciation: Theoretical and Applied Perspectives. P. C. Bjarkman, R. M. Hammond and H. Lopez Morales. Washington D.C., Georgetown University Press: 170-186.

O'Connor, R. M. (1989). “A Simplified Arabic Transliteration.” The Linguist 28(6): 208-209.

O'Halloran, G. (1979). “Indigenous Literacy Among the Mandinko of West Africa.” Journal of Reading 22(6): 492-497.

O’Connor, M. (1986). “Arabic loanwords in Nabatean Aramaic.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 45(3): 213-29.

Obeidat, H. A. (1984). “Relative Clauses in Standard Arabic Revisited.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 14(2): 77-96.

Obeidat, M. S. (1989). Expressionalization in Standard Arabic (A Study in the Light of the Historical Development of Arabic Grammar, Rhetoric, Jurisprudence and Modern Approaches), University of Exeter (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2881A



Obler, L. K. (1980). Classificatory structuralism in Medieval Arabic grammars: Az-Zajjazi’s 10th century “The Sentence”. Progress in Linguistic Historiography. K. Koerner and R. H. Robins. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 345-54.

Odden, D. (1990). “Phonology and Its Interaction with Syntax and Morphology.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 30(2): 69-108.

Odisho, E. Y. (1979). “Consonant Clusters and Abutting Consonants in English and Arabic Implications and Applications.” System 7(3): 205-210.

Odisho, E. Y. (1988). “Sibawayhi's Dichotomy of Majhura/Mahmusa Revisited.” Al-‘Arabiyya 21(1-2): 81-91.

Oglukh, F. I. (1990). “The Urum Subdialect of the Village of Staromlynivka of the Donets Region.” Movoznavstvo 24(2(140)): 52-61.

Ojeda, A. E. (1992). “The Semantics of Number in Arabic.” Working Papers in Linguistics (WPL) 40(1992 July): 303-325.

Ol’derogge, D. A. and A. A. Zhukov (1982). “African languages and general linguistics [From the history of African Studies].” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 31(4): 121-5.

Omar, A. H. (1984). “The development of the national language of Malaysia.” Phillipine Journal of Lingusitics 14-15(1-2): 7-23.

Omar, A. H. (1989). “The Malay Spelling Reform.” Journal of the Simplified Spelling Society 3(2): 9-13.

Omar, A. M. (1990). Grammatical Studies in Early Muslim Egypt. Proceedigns of 2nd Symposium on History of Arabic Grammar. Studies in the History ofArabic Grammar, II. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 10: 239-251.

Omer, A.-H. M. (1984). Arabic in the Sudanese setting: a sociolinguistic study, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:1715A

Omran, E. M. H. (1983). The Grammar Tradition in Arabic: Reform Efforts and Porposals for Reform, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:2512A

Oostdijk, N. (1988). “Corpus Linguistics in Perspective.” Interdisciplinair Tijdschrift voor Taal- & Tekstwetenschap 8(3): 209-224.

Orel, V. E. and O. V. Stolbova (1990). “On the Reconstruction of Proto-Afro-Asian Vocalism.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 39(2): 75-90.

Ormos, I. (1986). “A Key Factor in Avicenna's Theory of Phonation.” Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 40(2-3): 283-292.

Ornan, U. (1983). “An assumption concerning emphatic consonants in the Semitic languages.” Hebrew Computational Linguistics 20: 5-10.

Ortiz Armengol, P. (1988). “The Spanish Language in the Philippines.” Boletin de la Academia Hondurena de la Lengua 28(30): 119-122.

Orudzheva, L. M. (1980). “On the Problem 0f Forming Verbal Nouns in Arabic.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR,Literatura, yazyk, i iskusstvo 4: 62-7.

Orudzheva, L. (1984). “Nominal Parts of Speech-Names.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i iskusstvo 1: 119-123.

Osman, E.-S. A. (1988). The Phonological Theory of Sibawaihi; an Eighth Century Arab Grammarian, Georgetown University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2033A

Osman, M. H. (1990). Bound Anaphora in Egyptian Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 155-172.

Osman, M. H. (1990). The Syntax and Logical Form of Wh-Interrogatives in Cairene Egyptian Arabic, University of Washington.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:526A

Osman, M. E.-S. (1991). On the Communicative Role of Word Order on Written Modern Standard Arabic: A Contribution to Functional Linguistics, University of Salford.DAI No. BRD92725



Ostler, S. E. (1987). A Study of the Contrastive Rhetoric of Arabic, English, Japanese, and Spanish, University of Southern California.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:245A

Ostler, S. E. (1987). English in Parallels: A Comparison of English and Arabic Prose. Writing across Languages: Analysis of L2 Text. U. Connor and R. B. Kaplan. Reading, Addison-Wesley: 169-185.

Otake, T. (1988). “A Temporal Compensation Effect in Arabic and Japanese.” The Bulletin, The Phonetic Society of Japan 189(Dec): 19-24.

Ouaouicha, D. (1986). Contrastive rhetoric and the structure of learner-produced argumentative texts in Arabic and English, University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:3339A

Ouellette, J. (1980). “An Unnoticed Device for Expressing the Future in Middle Hebrew.” Hebrew Annual Review 4: 127-130.

Owens, J. (1980). “Monogenesis, the universal and the particular in Creole studies.” Anthropological Linguistics 22(3): 97-117.

Owens, J. (1980). “The Syllable as Prosody - A Re-Analysis of Syllabification in Eastern Libyan Arabic.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies-University of London 43(2): 277-287.

Owens, J. (1984). “Structure, class, and dependency: modern linguistic theory and the Arabic grammatical tradition.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 64(1): 25-62.

Owens, J. (1984). “The Noun Phrase in Arabic Grammatical Theory.” Al-‘Arabiyya 17(1-2): 47-86.

Owens, J. (1984). “Structure, Class and Dependency: Modern Linguistic Theory and the Arabic Grammatical Tradition.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 64(1): 25-62.

Owens, J. (1985). “Arabic dialects of Chad and Nigeria.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 14: 45-61.

Owens, J. (1985). “Origins of East African Nubi.” Anthropological Linguistics 27(3): 229-71.

Owens, J. (1986). The Comparative Study of Medieval Arabic Grammatical Theory. The Fergusonian Impact. J. A. Fishman: 223-237.

Owens, J. and R. Bani-Yasin (1987). “The lexical basis of variation in Jordanian Arabic.” Linguistics 25(4(290)): 705-38.

Owens, J. (1988). The Foundations of Grammar: An Introduction to Medieval Arabic Grammatical Theory. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Owens, J. (1989). “The Syntactic Basis of Arabic Word Classificaiton.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 36(no. 2, 1989 July): 211-234.

Owens, J. (1989). “Zur Pidginisierung und Kreolisierung im Arabischen.” Afrika und Ubersee: Sprachen-Kulturen 72(1): 91-107.

Owens, J. (1990). Early Arabic Grammatical Theory: Heterogeneity and Standardization. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Owens, J. (1990). Themes in the Development of Arabic Grammatical Theory. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on History of Arabic Grammar. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. x: 253-263.

Owens, J. (1990). “East African Nubi: Bioprogram vs Inheritance.” Diachronica: International Journal for Historical Linguistics 7(2): 217-250.

Owens, J. (1991). “Models for Interpreting the Development of Medieval Arabic Grammatical Theory.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 111(2): 225-238.

Paled, Y. (1987). “"Conditional Sentences without a Conditional Particle" in Classical Arabic Prose.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 31-43.

Palmer, E. L. (1979). “Linguistic Innovation in the Arabic Adaptation of "Sesame Street".” Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics: 287-294.

Palva, H. (1982). “Patterns of Koineization in Modern Colloquial Arabic.” Acta Orientalia 43: 13-32.



Palva, H. (1984). “Characteristics of the Arabic Dialect of the Hwetat Tribe.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 295-312.

Palva, H. (1989). “The Cultural Context of Arabic Epics and North Arabian Bedouin Poetry.” Orientalia Suecana (OS) 38-39(1989-1990): 112-119.

Palva, H. (1991). “The -un in the Colloquial Arabic Genitive Exponents haggun, taba'un and bta'un.” Folia Orientalia 28: 129-133.

Parkinson, D. B. (1981). VSO to SVO in Modern Standard Arabic: A study in diglossia syntax. Syntactic Change. B. Johns and D. Strong. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Department of Linguistics. Monograph No. 25: 159-176.

Parkinson, D. B. (1982). Terms of Address in Egyptian Arabic, The University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:437A

Parkinson, D. B. (1985). Constructing the Social Context of Communication: Terms of Address in Egyptian Arabic. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter.

Parkinson, D. B. (1986). Constraints on optional pronoun use in spoken Egyptian Arabic. Deseret Language and Linguistics Society.

Parkinson, D. B. (1987). Constraints on the presence/absence of ‘optional’ subject pronouns in Egyptian Arabic. Variation in Language: NWAV-XV at Stanford. K. M. Denning, S. Inkelas, F. C. McNair-Knox and J. R. Rickford. Stanford, Stanford University: 348-360.

Parkinson, D. B. (1988). “Egyptian Arabic Abuse.” Maledicta: The International Journal of Verbal Aggression 10: 145-161.

Parkinson, D. B. (1990). Orthographic variation in Modern Standard Arabic: The case of the hamza. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 269-295.

Parkinson, D. B. (1991). “Searching for Modern Fusha: Real Life Formal Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 24: 31-64.

Parkinson, D. B. (1993). Knowing Standard Arabic: Testing Egyptians' MSA Abilities. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Phildelphia/Amsterdam, John Benjamins. V: 47-74.

Parry, L. D. B. (1989). “Arabic/Islamic Presence in the Americas Before Columbus: Indisputable Proof Based upon the Power and Placement of M.” The Epigraphic Society Occasional Publications 18: 134-136.

Parzymies, A. (1979). “Noms de personnes en Algerie.” Folia Orientalia (FoliaO) 20: 107-118.

Pasch, H. and R. Thelwall (1987). Losses and Innovations in Nubi. Varia Creolica. P. Maurer and T. Stolz. Bochum, Brockmeyer: 91-165.

Patterson, W. T. (1986). “Lexical borrowings in Spanish: function, length, genealogy and chronology.” The Canadian Modern Language Review 42(3): 629-34.

Peled, Y. (1985). “On the obligatoriness of fa- in classical Arabic in conditional sentences.” Journal of Semitic Studies 30(2): 213-225.

Peled, Y. (1987). “'Conditional Sentences without a Conditional Particle' in Classical Arabic Prose.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 16: 31-43.

Pellegrini, G. B. (1986). “On Orientalisms in Ligurian Dialects.” Rivista Italiana di Dialettologia: Scuola Societa Territorio 10(1(10)): 219-228.

Pena, S. (1988). “El corpus de los linguistas musulmanes y la nocion de autoridad.” Miscelanea de Estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. Filologia Hebrea, Biblia y Judaismo 37(1): 195-209.

Penarroja Torrejon, L. (1991). “El arabe /kanisa/ 'iglesia' en la toponimia espanola.” Revista de Filologia Espanola 71: 347-354.

Perdue, C. and J. Deulofeu (1986). “Structuring of the utterance: A longitudinal study (La structuration de l’enonce: etude longitudinale).” Languages 21(84): 43-63.

Perez Botero, L. (1983). “Aspects of Castilian Adjectivization.” Yelmo 58-59(Oct-Mar): 14-16.



Perry, J. R. (1984). “Differential Assimilation of Some Arabic Loanwords in Tajik and Uzbek.” Folia Slavica 7(1-2): 268-282.

Persson, A., J. Persson, et al. (1979). Sudanese Colloquial Arabic for Beginners. Horsleys Green, High Wycombe, England, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Peter, F. (1985). “Noch einmal gamasa.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 14: 78.

Peterson, P. L. (1985). “Event.” Linguistic Analysis 15(1): 3-18.

Petracek, K. (1981). “Le Systeme de l'arabe dans une perspective diachronique.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(1981 June-Sept.): 162-177.

Pfaff, C. W. (1979). “Acquisition and Development of Gastarbeiterdeutsch by Migrant Workers and Their Children in Germany.” International Conference on Historical Linguistics.

Pfaff, C. W. (1981). “Sociolinguistic problems of immigrants: foreign workers and their children in Germany (a review article).” Language in Society 10(2): 155-88.

Pfaff, C. W., Ed. (1987). First and Second Language Acquisition Processes. Cambridge, MA, Newbury House Publishers.

Piamenta, M. (1981). Selected Syntactic Phenomena of Jerusalem Arabic Narrative Style in 1900. Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by HisStudies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His. S. Morag. Jerusalem, Magnes Press: 203-230.

Picard, M. (1979). “The Syllable Boundary in Generative Phonology.” The Canadian Journal of Linguistics 24(2): 119-131.

Piel, J. M. (1980). Beitrage zur Kenntnis der toponymischen Mozarabismen Sudportugals. Romanica Europaea et Americana Festschrift für Harri Meier, 8. Januar 1980. H. D. Bork, A. Greive and D. Woll. Bonn, Bouvier: 437-442.

Pilaszewicz, S. (1987). “Arabic and Hausa: Two Vehicles of the Hausa Literary Tradition.” Rocznik Orientalistyczny 45(2): 67-72.

Pilaszewicz, S. (1989). “From Arabic to Hausa: The Case of the Hausa Poet Alhaji Umaru.” Rocznik Orientalistyczny 46(1): 97-104.

Piron, C. (1979). “Understanding Among Africans: Linguistic Isolation and Linguistic Communication.” Esperanto Documents 17A: 1-16.

Piron, C. (1980). “Problems of linguistic communication in the United Nations and related organizations.” Language Problems and Language Planning 4(3): 224-38.

Plunkett, B. (1993). The Position of Subjects in Modern Standard Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 231-260.

Plunkett, B. (1993). Specifiers and Subject Positions, University of Massachusetts.Dissertation Abstracts International 54:505A

Pocklington, R. (1986). “El sustrato arabigo-granadino en la formacion de los dialectos orientales del Andaluz.” Revista de Filologia Espanola 66(1-2): 75-100.

Poizner, H. and H. Lane (1979). “Cerebral Asymmetry in the Perception of American Sign Language.” Brain and Language 7(2): 210-226.

Port, R. F., S. Al-Ani, et al. (1980). “Temporal compensation and universal phonetics.” Journal of Phonetica 37: 235-52.

Port, R. F. and F. M. Mitleb (1983). “Segmental features and implementation in acquisition of English by Arabic speakers.” Journal of Phonetics 11(3): 219-29.

Posner, R. (1983). “Numbers and their signs.” Grazer Linguistische Studien 19: 141-58.

Poveda Sanchez, A. (1980). “Introduccion al estudio de la toponimia arabe musulmana de Mayurqa segun la documentacion de los archivos de la ciutat de Mallorca (1232-1276).” Awraq 3: 75-109.



Powels, S. (1989). “On the Etymology of the Word "Sugar" and Its Use by the Hindus, Persians and Arabs.” Mediterranean Language Review 4-5: 1-21.

Power, R. J. D. and M. F. Dal Martello (1990). “The Dictation of Italian Numerals.” Language and Cognitive Processes 5(3): 237-254.

Prevaes, M. (1990). “Maltese: A Language between two cultures.” Van Taal tot Taal 34(2): 63-73.

Prince, A. (1989). Metrical Forms. Rhythm and Meter. P. Kiparsky: 45-80.

Prochazka, T., Jr. (1981). “The Shi'i Dialects of Bahrain and Their Relationship to the Eastern Arabian Dialect of Muharraq and The Omani Dialect of al-Ristaq.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 16-55.

Prochazka, T., Jr. (1987). “Remarks on the spoken Arabic of Zabid.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17: 58-68.

Prochazka, T., Jr. (1988). Saudi Arabic Dialects. London, Routledge, Chapman & Hall Ltd.

Prochazka, T., Jr. (1988). “The Spoken Arabic of Abu Thor in Al-Hasa.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics` 18: 59-76.

Prochazka, T., Jr. (1988). “Gleanings from Southwestern Saudi Arabia.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 19: 44-49.

Prochazka, T. (1990). “The Spoken Arabic of Al-Qatif.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21: 63-70.

Puig-Montada, J. (1988). “Bemerkungen zum Begriff der Determination im Arabischen.” Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 42(2-3): 361-369.

Qasem, Z. A. (1986). The development of an Arabic reading inventory for Jordanian elementary schools first through fourth grade levels, Michigan State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2525A

Quinsat, F. (1991). “Emprunts a l'arabe d'Afrique du Nord: Mots argotiques, grossiers, pejoratifs ou familiers.” Le Francais Moderne: Revue de Linguistique Francaise 59(2): 164-187.

Rabie, M. S. (1991). A Sociolinguistic Study of Diglossia of Egyptian Radio Arabic: An Ethnographic Approach, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:1312A

Racheva, M. (1979). “Etymological Problems of Early Semitic Borrowings in Slavic Languages.” Zeitschrift für Slawistik 24(1): 105-114.

Radwan, M. A. (1988). A Linguistic Analysis of the Grammatical and Lexical Errors in the Nominal Group Found in the Written English of Syrian University Students (Volumes I-III), University of Nottingham (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1392A

Rajouani, A. (1986). Analysis for synthesis of Arabic pharyngealized sounds. 11th Meeting of the Acoustical Society of America, Cleveland.

Rajouani, A., M. Najim, et al. (1987). “Synthesis of the Pharyngealization Feature in Arabic.” Speech Communication 6(3): 261-268.

Rammuny, R. M. (1985). “Al-Jurjani: A Pioneer of Grammatical and Linguistic Studies.” Historiographia Linguistica: International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences 12(3): 351-71.

Rammuny, R. M. (1986). “The role of Al-Jurjani’s concept of Ta’liq in the development of Arabic grammatical theory and linguistic analysis.” International Journal of Islamic & Arabic Studies 3(1): 27-42.

Rammuny, F. M. (1989). “Instrumental and Auditory Analysis of Colloquial Jordanian Arabic. An Update.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 20: 23-42.

Raof, A.-H. F. (1988). Subject, Theme and Agent in Modern Standard Arabic, University of Leeds (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 51:155A

Rasmussen, S. (1980). “An Analysis of Colloquial Elements in the Syntax of Hadit 'usfur al-mulaqqab bi-Abi Disah.” Acta Orientalia 41:



39-68.

Rassam, Y. (1984). “Miscelanea de estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II.” Filologia Hebrea, Biblia y Judaismo 32-33(1): 37-54.

Ratcliffe, R. R. (1988). Arabic Broken Plurals: Arguments for a two-fold classification of morphology. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 94-119.

Ratcliffe, R. R. (1990). Arabic Broken Plurals: Arguments for a Two-Fold Classification of Morphology. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 94-119.

Ratcliffe, R. R. (1992). The Broken Plural Problem in Arabic, Semitic, and Afroasiatic: A Solution Based on the Diachronic Application of Prosodic Analysis, Yale University.Dissertation Abstracts International 54:164A

Red'kin, O. I. (1983). “The Varying of the Guttural Explosion [hamza] in the Arabic Literary Language.” Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura 38(4(20)): 70-74.

Reguigui, A. (1986). “Borrowing and normalization in the Arabic language (Emprunt et normalisation en langue arabe).” Langues et Linguistique 12: 197-227.

Reguigui, A. (1992). La Neonymie en Terminologie de Langue Arabe: Aspects et Problemes de la Formation Syntagmatique, University of Laval.

Rehail, H. (1992). “Equivalence, culture et traduction.” Linguistica 32: 221-225.

Reichel-Baumgartner, B. (1988). “Parameter des Idiolekts des Propheten Muhammad auf Grundlage des Sahih von al Buhari.” Wiener Zeits. für die Kunde des Morgenlandes 78: 121-159.

Reichmuth, S. (1981). “Die Farbebezeichnungen in sudanesisch-arabischen Dialekten.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 56-68.

Reid, J. M. (1988). Quantitative Differences in English Prose Written By Arabic, Chinese, Spanish, and English Students, Colorado State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:672A

Rendsburg, G. A. (1988). Hebrew sw/yh and Arabic shh. FOCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. Y. L. Arbeitman. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 419-430.

Renfroe, F. H., II (1989). Arabic and Ugaritic Lexicography, Yale University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3567A

Resink, P. (1984). Similitudes Syntaxiques en Arabe et Berbere Maghrebins. Papers from 3rd International Hamito-Semito Cong. Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Lingistics. J. Bynon. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xi: 324-354.

Retso, J. (1983). The Finite Passive Voice in Modern Arabic Dialects. Götenborg, Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis.

Retso, J. (1984). “State, Determination and Definiteness in Arabic: A Reconsideration.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 341-346.

Retso, J. (1988). “Pronominal Suffixes with -n(n)- in Arabic Dialects and Other Semitic Languages.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 18: 77-94.

Reuschel, W. (1981). “Die Kasus im Arabischen.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 34: 152-159.

Reuschel, W. (1986). ““One, Two and More Than Two” from the perspective of Arabic grammar (“Eins, zwei und mehr als zwei” aus der sicht der arabischen Grammatik).” Linguistische Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte 148: 194-203.

Rhodes, J. D. (1979). “Charles S. Peirce's Arabic Grammar.” Ars Semeiotica 2(3): 365-368.

Riad, E. (1984). “Wtb 'to Sit' and 'to Jump', qfs 'to Pull Together' and 'to Jump'.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 347-353.

Riad, E. (1989). “Deux details de la preface du Kitab Adab Al-Katib d'Ibn.” Orientalia Suecana (OS) 38-39(1989-1990): 140-148.



Ricks, S. D. (1982). A Lexicon of Epigraphic Qatabanian, Graduate Theological Union.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:783A

Riguet, M. (1980). “Word association: A comparative study between bilingual Tunisians [Arabic-French] and monolingual Tunisians.” Revue Internationale de Psychologie Appliquee 29(1-2): 183-204.

Riguet, M. (1981). “Variations of Opinion According to Language in the Tunisian Environment.” IBLA, Revue de l'Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis 44(3(149)): 57-86.

Rintell, E. M. (1984). “But how did you feel about that? The learner’s perception of emotion in speech.” Applied Linguistics 5(2): 255-64.

Rippin, A. (1983). “Qur'an 78/24: A Study in Arabic Lexicography.” Journal of Semitic Studies 28(no. 2): 311-320.

Rissanen, S. (1991). Der richtige Sinn der Bibel bei Theodor Abu Qurra. Fourth Finnish-German Theologists' Conference (Makarios Symposium), Turky: Abo Academy.

Rivarola, J.-L. (1985). “Albaquia-Baquia-Baquiano: Notes on the origin of one americanism.” Zeitschift für romanische Philologie 101(1-2): 45-51.

Roberts, J. M. and J. C. Hayes (1987). “Young adult male categorization of fifty Arabic proverbs.” Anthropological Linguistics 29(1): 35-48.

Robertson, C. D. (1990). The Effects of Orthographic Variation on Word Latency, Pronunciation, Speed and Comprehension of Nonnative Readers of Arabic, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:1941A

Robinson, D. (1982). “Fulfulde Literature in Arabic Script.” History in Africa 9: 251-261.

Robinson, T. H. (1986). Evaluating Foreign Students’ Compositions: The effects of rater background and of handwriting, spelling, and grammar, University of Texas.

Rockey, D. and P. Johnstone (1979). “Medieval Arabic Views on Speech Disorders: Al-Razi (c.865-925).” Journal of Communication Disorders 12(3): 229-243.

Rolland, J.-C. (1979). L'Arabe parle au Caire. Cairo, No publisher.

Rollins, J. D. (1985). Literary Theory in Africa: A Rapprochement Between Linguistics and Literary History : The Case of the Swahili “Hadithi”. Interdisciplinary Dimensions of African Literature. K. Anyidoho, A. Porter, D. Racine and J. Spleth. Washington, DC, Three Continents Press. series no: 8: 129-135.

Roman, A. (1981). “De la langue arabe comme un modele general de la formation des langues semitiques et de leur evolution.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.): 127-161.

Roman, A. (1983). Sur la constitution des unites de la langue arabe. Les Parties du discours. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 113-144.

Roman, A. (1983). Etude de la phonologie et de la morphologie de la koine Arabe. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence.

Roman, A. (1984). Les Modalites de voix du verbe arabe. Le Passif. D. Bresson. Aix-en-Provence, Pubs. Univ. de Provence.

Roman, G., B. Pavard, et al. (1985). “Perceptive Analysis of Arabic Ambiguous Sentences.” Cahiers de Psychologie Cognitive 5(1): 5-22.

Roman, A. (1985). Sur la constitution de la phrase et la phrase arabe. Travaux, III: Les Relations syntaxiques. Aix-en-Provence, University de Provence: 105-119.

Roman, A. (1987). “Recognition of the Arabic Protolanguage as a “System of systems,” a basis of neologistic creativity (La Reconnaissance de la protolangue arabe comme un “systeme de systemes”: base pour la creativity neologique).” Meta 32(2): 170-85.

Roman, A. (1988). Les Formes infinitives de l'arabe dans l'organisation generalede la langue arabe. L'Infinitif: Une Approche comparative. S. Remi-Giraud. Lyon, PU de Lyon: 211-242.



Roman, A. and J. Dichy (1989). “Aspect in Arabic.” Les Langues Modernes 83(3-4): 135-141.

Roman, A. (1989). Vers une theorie generale de la production des signifiants linguistiques: L'Exemple 'probant' de l'arabe. La Signification. M.-C. Hazael-Massieux. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 73-113.

Roman, A. (1991). La Traduction de l'attribut en arabe. A la recherche de l'attribut. M.-M. de Gaulmyn and S. Remi-Giraud. Lyon, PU de Lyon.

Ronnow, G. (1984). “The oral vs. the written: a dialectic of worldviews in Najib Mahfouz’s “Children of our Alley”.” Al-‘Arabiyya 17(1-2): 87-118.

Roper, G. (1988). Arabic Printing in Malta, 1825-1845: Its History and Its Place in the Development of Print Culture in the Arab Middle East, University of Durham (United Kingdom).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:901C

Rosenberg, A. L. (1979). “The Hardest Natural Languages.” Lingvisticae Investigationes 3(2): 323-339.

Rosenhouse, J. (1978). “Circumstantial clauses in some Arabic dialects.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft: 226-237.

Rosenhouse, J. (1982). “Some Features of Some Bedouin Dialects in the North of Israel.” 7: 23-47.

Rosenhouse, J. (1983). “Texts in the Dialect of the 'Aramsha Bedouins (Northern Israel).” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 10: 39-70.

Rosenhouse, J. (1984). “Towards a Classification of Bedouin Dialects in Israel.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 47(3): 508-522.

Rosenhouse, J. (1984). The Bedouin Arabic Dialects--General Problems and a close analysis of North Israel Bedouin Dialects. Wiesbaden, Otto Harrassowitz Publishers.

Rosenhouse, J. (1988). “Occurrence of the Passive in Different Types of Text in English, Hebrew and Arabic.” Babel 34(2): 90-103.

Rosenhouse, J. (1989). “Translation from English into Arabic: Implications for Text Linguistics.” Dept General Studies Technion-Israel Instit Technology 27(2): 125-136.

Rosenhouse, J. and A. M. Cohen (1990). “The Passive in Arabic, Hebrew and English and Machine Translation.” Literary and Linguistic Computing: Journal of the Association for Literary and Linguistic Computing 5(1): 9-18.

Rosenthal, F. (1981). Nastabiqu in Surah 12:17. Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His Students, Colleagues, and Friends. S. Morag. Jerusalem.

Rosenthal, F. (1989). “The History of an Arabic Proverb.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 109(3): 349-378.

Rossi, J. P. and C. Loridant (1986). “Graphophonological Coding in the Identification of Visual Stimuli.” Candadian Journal of Psychology 40(4): 463-472.

Roth, N. (1983). “Jewish reactions to the ‘Arabiyya and the renaissance of Hebrew in Spain.” Journal of Semitic Studies 28(1): 63-84.

Rouchdy, A. (1980). “Languages in contact: Arabic-Nubian.” Anthropological Linguistics 22(8): 334-44.

Rouchdy, A. (1989). Urban and Non-Urban Egyptian Nubian: Is There a Reduction in Language Skill? Investigating Obsolescence: Studies in Language Contraction and Death. N. C. Dorian. New York, Cambridge University Press: 259-266.

Rouchdy, A. (1989). 'Persistence' or 'Tip' in Egyptian Nubian. Investigating Obsolescence: Studies in Language Contraction and Death. N. C. Dorian. New York, Cambridge University Press: 91-102.

Rouchdy, A. (1991). Nubians and the Nubian Language in Contemporary Egypt: A Case of Cultural and Linguistic Contact. Leiden, E.J. Brill.

Rouchdy, A., Ed. (1991). The Arabic Language in America: A Sociolinguistic Study on a Growing Bilingual Community. Detroit, Wayne State



University Press.

Rouchdy, A. (1991). Nubians and the Nubian Language: A situation of Linguistic and Cultural Contacts. Leiden, E.J. Brill.

Rouchdy, A., Ed. (1992). Arabic in the Dearborn Mosques. The Arabic Language in America. Detroit, Wayne State University Press.

Rouchdy, A. (1992). Borrowing in Arab-American Speech. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 36-49.

Rouchdy, A., Ed. (1992). The Arabic Language in America. Detroit, Wayne State University Press.

Royal, A. M. (1985). Male/Female Pharyngealization Patterns in Cairo Arabic: A Sociolinguistic Study of Two Neighborhoods, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3338A

Russell, R. (1977). Word Order of Classical and Egyptian Arabic, Harvard University.

Russell, R. (1977). Word order and discourse function in Arabic, Harvard University.

Russell, R. A. (1986). Historical Aspects of Subject-Verb Agreement in Arabic. Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL). Columbus, Dept. of Linguistics, Ohio State University. 1: 116-127.

Rybalkin, V. S. (1991). “A. Iu. Kryms'kyi iak arabist-dialektoloh.” Movoznavstvo: Naukovo-Teoretychnyi Zhurnal Viddilennia Literatury, Movy i Mystetstvoznavstva Akademii Nauk Ukr 2: 68-74.

Ryding, K. (1981). “Semantic Motivation for Arabic Dative-Movement.” Al-‘Arabiyya 14: 19-23.

Ryding, K. (1989). “The Search for Paradigm: Linguistic Analysis in Medieval Mesopotamia.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 6(1): 31-38.

Ryding, K. (1990). Alchemy and Linguistics: Connections in Early Islam. International Conference on the History of Alchemy, University of Groningen, Leiden: Brill.

Ryding, K. (1992). Morphosyntactic Analysis in Al-Jumal fii l-nahw. Discourse structure and metalanguage. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins: 263+.

Rzewuski, E. (1991). Mother Tongue/Father Tongue Convergence: On Swahilization and Deswahilization in Mozambique. Minoritatensprachen/Sprachminoritaten. J. R. Dow, T. Stolz, N. Boretzky, W. Enninger and M. Perl. Bochum, Brockmeyer: 267-305.

Sa‘adeddin, M. A. A. M. (1989). “Text Development and Arabic-English Negative Interference.” Applied Linguistics 10(1): 36-51.

Saad, G. (1979). “Sibawayhi's Treatment of Transitivity.” Al-‘Arabiyya 12: 83-88.

Saad, G. N. (1982). Transitivity, Causation and Passivization: A Semantic-Syntactic Study of the Verb in Classical Arabic. London, Kegan Paul International.

Saad, G. N. and S. Bolozky (1984). “Causativization and Transitivization in Arabic and Modern Hebrew.” Afroasiatic Linguistics 9(2): 29-38.

Sabar, Y. (1984). “The Arabic Elements in the Jewish Neo-Aramaic Texts of Nerwa and 'Amadiya, Iraqi Kurdistan.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 104(1): 201-211.

Sabra, S. M. (1987). The Acquisition of English Syntax by Four Arabic-Speaking Children, Michigan State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:1779A

Sabuni, A. (1980). Laut- und Formenlehre des arabischen Dialekts von Aleppo. Frankfurt a. M., Lang.

Sabuni, A. (1981). Einfuhrung in die Arabistik. Hamburg, Buske.



Sadygov, E. (1989). “Some Syntactic Figures Used in Fizuli's Poetry.” Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, Yazyk i Iskusstvo 2: 74-78.

Safar, H. (1987). “Immigration and Native Language: The Case of the Mahgrebian Community in Belgium.” Le Langage et l'Homme 22(2(64)): 127-130.

Safi, S. (1992). Funcitons of Code-Switching: Saudi Arabic in the United States. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 72-80.

Safi-Stagni, S. (1990). Slips of the Tongue in Arabic. Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiii: 271-290.

Safi-Stagni, S. (1991). Agrammatism in Arabic. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perpsectives on Arabic LInguistics. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 251-270.

Safi-Stagni, S. (1994). Arabic Segmental Errors and Segmental Phonology. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 169-184.

Said, H. A. d. A.-K. (1988). The Cohesive Role of Reference, Substitution, and Ellipsis in Two Genres of Modern Literary Arabic, Texas A&M University.Dissertation Abstracts International 49:3352A

Sakai, Y. (1986). “Motion of gender (III): Italian and Spanish in the lexicon of plants.” Sophia Linguistics 20-21: 411-20.

Sakhnini, H. M. A. (1984). Arabic Morphology as Described by Ibn Jinni in At-Tasrif al-Muluki, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:1386A

Salam, A. M. (1980). “Phonological variation in educated spoken Arabic: a study of the uvular and related plosive types.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies-University of London 43: 77-100.

Salame, P. and A. Baddeley (1986). “Phonological Factors in STM: Similarity and the Unattended Speech Effect.” The Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society 24(4): 263-265.

Salame, P. and A. Baddeley (1990). “The Effects of Irrelevant Speech on Immediate Free Recall.” The Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society 28(6): 540-542.

Saleh, W. (1992). “La polemica del lenguaje en el teatro arabe.” Primer Acto: Cuadernos de Investigacion Teatral 245: 28-33.

Salib, M. B. (1979). Spoken Literary Arabic: Oral Approximation of Literary Arabic in Egyptian Formal Discourse, University of California, Berkeley.Dissertation Abstracts International 40:4010A

Salib, M. H. (1981). Spoken Arabic of Cairo. Cairo, American University in Cairo Press.

Salibi, K. S. (1981). Hadramut: A Name with a Story. Festschrift for Ihsan 'Abbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. Studia Arabica et Islamica. W. Al-Qadi. Beirut, American Univ. of Beirut: 393-397.

Salih, M. (1985). Aspects of Clause Structure in Standard Arabic: A Study in Relational Grammar, State University of New York-Buffalo.

Salih, M. H. (1986). Raising in Universal Grammar. State University of New York at Buffalo. Proceedings of the Second Eastern States Conf. on Linguistics. S. Choi, D. Devitt, W. Janis, T. MCCoy and Z.-s. Zhang. Columbus, Dept. of Linguistics, OSU: 325-336.

Salmon, V. (1988). “Anglo-Dutch Linguistic Scholarship: A Survey of Seventeenth-Century Achievements.” Historiographia Linguistica 15(1-2): 129-153.

Salonen, E. (1980). “On the Arabic dialect of Gaza [Part II].” Annales Academiae Scientiarum Fennicae/Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia Series B 213: 1-62.



Salonen, E. (1980). Zum arabischen Dialekt von Gaza, II. Helsinki: Suomalainen Tiedeakatemia. Helsinki, Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia.

Salonen , E. (1980). “On the Arabic dialect spoken in Sirqat.” Annales Academiae Scientiarum Fennicae/Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia, Series B 212: 1-131.

Sammander, A. R. (1987). A comparison of spoken with written texts with respect to error and non-error cohesive ties and syntactic structures of adults Arabic-speaking learners of English as a foreign language, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:1138A

Samoeil, S. (1992). The Arabic Novels Since 1950: A Selected Bibliography of Critical Studies. Mundus Arabicus. Cambridge, Mass, Dar Mahjar. 5.

Sanchez Alvarez, M. (1981). Simbiosis arabe-romance en el lexico de los textos aljamiados. Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. Madrid: Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura: 389-393.

Sanni, A. (1989). “On tadmin (enjambment) and Structural Coherence in Classical Arabic Poetry.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 52(3): 463-466.

Santos, M. J. d. M. (1980). “Importacao Lexical e Estruturacao Semantica: Os Arabismos na Lingua Portuguesa.” Biblos 56: 573-596.

Sara, S. I. (1991). “Al-Khalil: the first Arab phonologist.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 8.1: 1-57.

Saraireh, M. A. (1990). Some Lexical and Syntactic Problems in English-Arabic Translation, The University of Wisconson, Madison.Dissertation Abstracts International 51:1216A

Sarig, L. (1990). “The Reflection of Word Order in Contemporary Hebrew through Translations from Arabic.” Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects 55(1-2): 127-139.

Sarig, L. (1992). “On Two Style Markers of Modern Arabic-Hebrew Prose Translations.” Target: International Journal of Translation Studies 4(2): 209-222.

Sawaie, M. (1980). Discourse Reference and Pronominalization in Arabic, The Ohio State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 41:3089A

Sawaie, M. (1982). Nouns or Pronouns? That Question in Arabic. Papers from the Parasession on Nondeclaratives. Chicago, Chicago Linguistic Society: 194-201.

Sawaie, M. and J. A. Fishman (1985). “Arabic-language maintenance efforts in the United States.” The Journal of Ethnic Studies 13(2): 33-49.

Sawaie, M. (1986). “The Present and Future Status of Minority Language: The Case of Arabic in the United States.” Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 7(1): 31-40.

Sawaie, M. (1986). Arabic Language Academies as Language Planners. Languages in the International Perspective. N. Schweda-Nicholson. Norwood, NJ, Ablex: 56-65.

Sawaie, M. (1987). “Jurji Zaydan (1861-1914): a modernist in Arabic linguistics.” Historiographia Linguistica 14(2): 283-304.

Sawaie, M. (1987). “Speakers attitudes toward linguistic variation: a case study of some Arabic dialects.” Linguistische Berichte 107: 3-22.

Sawaie, M. (1990). An Aspect of 19th Century Arabic Lexicography: The Modernizing Role and Contribution of Faris al-Shidyaq. History and Historiography of Linguistics: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on the History of the Language Sciences. H.-J. Niederehe and K. Koerner. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xxv: 157-171.

Sawaie, M. (1992). Arabic in the Melting Pot: Will It Survive? The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 83-99.



Sayed, A. A. (1981). The Phonology of Moroccan Arabic: A Generative Phonological Approach, University of Texas at Austin.

Sayyid, M. A.-W. (1975). “Arabic Kinesics.” Al-‘Arabiyya 8(1-2): 47-51.

Sayyid, M. A.-W. (1982). “An International Phonetic Arabic Alphabet.” Dara (Riyadh).: 4-11.

Sbait, D. H. (1986). “Poetic and musical structure in the improvised-sung colloquial Qasidih of the Palestinian poet-singers.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 75-108.

Scarcella, R. and J. Brunak (1981). “On speaking politely in a second language.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 27: 59-75.

Schabram, H. (1990). “Electre and a[u]•mber: On the designations of white gold and amber in Middle and Early Modern English.” Anglia 108(1-2): 1-18.

Schenker, A. M. (1989). “The Gnezdovo Inscription in its historical and linguistic setting.” Russian Linguistics 13(3): 207-220.

Schiller, J. L. (1989). Writing in L1-writing in L2: Case studies of the composing processes of five adult arabic-speaking ESL writers, New York University.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2883A

Schlossberg, E. (1986). “A Weak f" in the Language of Ishma'el - in the Language of R. Yosef Karo.” Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects/Ketav-'Et le-Heqer ha-Lashon 51(1-2): 122-128.

Schmidt, J. J. (1979). Vocabulaire d'arabe moderne. Paris, Maison du Dictionnaire.

Schmidt, B. (1986). “On the formation of literary Malagasy in the nineteenth century (Zur Ausbildung einer madagassischen Literatursprache im 19 Jahrhundert).” Linguistische Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte 148: 240-51.

Schmidt, R. (1986). “Applied sociolinguistics: the case of Arabic as a second language.” Anthropological Linguistics 28(1): 55-72.

Schmidt, A. M. (1988). The Acquistion of Some American English Duration Parameters by Nonnative Speakers of English, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:128A

Schoch, G. (1989). “The Notion of Mutawa‘a and the Arabic Verbal System.” Linguistische Studien 189: 17-28.

Schub, M. B. (1981). “A Sublime Subtlety?” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 6: 72-73.

Schub, M. B. (1982). “The expression of panchronic actions in Arabic; an exegetical clarification.” Journal of Semitic Studies 27(1): 57-9.

Schub, M. B. (1982). “A note of a sextuple plural in Arabic and more on plurals of paucity and abundance.” Al-‘Arabiyya 15(1-2): 153-155.

Schub, M. B. (1983). “A 'Case' of Desinence and Denigration.” Al-‘Arabiyya 16(1-2): 131-134.

Schub, M. B. (1984). “'Iqham: The Annexation of a Binominal to a Genitive: A Deviation from Semiticity in Syntax?” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 13: 86-91.

Schub, M. B. (1986). “Expressing age.” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 137-8.

Schub, M. B. (1987). “The Morphological Pattern fi‘lun For Dichotomies.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 119-120.

Schub, M. B. (1988). “Two Notes.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 18: 95-97.

Schuchardt, H. (1979). “On Lingua Franca.” Linguistica Extranea 3: 26-47.

Schuh, R. G. (1989). Toward a Metrical Analysis of Hausa Verse Prosody: Mutadaarik. 18th Conf. on African LInguistics. Current Approaches to African Linguistics, VI. I. Haik and L. Tuller. Dordrecht, Foris. series no: 9: 161-175.



Schulz, D. E. (1981). Diglossia and Variation in Formal Spoken Arabic in Egypt, The University of Wisconson, Madison.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:2116A

Schulz, E. (1986). “The first translation of work by Lenin into Arabic (Die erste Ubersetzung eines Leninwerkes in das Arabische).” Linguistische Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichts 148: 252-64.

Schulz, E. (1989). “Lexical Synonymy in Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 68-80.

Schulz, E. (1989). “Theoretische und praktische Probleme einer arabischen Synonymik für deutschsprachige Worterbuchbenutzer.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 42(6): 810-815.

Schweda-Nicholson, N., Ed. (1986). Languages in the International Perspective. Delaware Symposia on Language Studies. Norwood, Ablex Publishing Corporation.

Sciriha, A.-L. (1986). A sociolinguistics study of monophthongization in Maltese, Victoria University (Toronto, Canada).Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2568A

Sciriha, L. (1989). “Language Maintenance and Language Shift of the Maltese Migrants in Canada.” Journal of Maltese Studies 19-20(1989-1990): 34-41.

Scmitt-Brandt, R. (1979). “Berber Influences in Maghrebian Arabic.” Folia Linguistica 13(3-4): 229-235.

Segal, J. B. (1986). “Arabs at Hatra and the vicinity: marginalia on new Aramaic texts.” Journal of Semitics Studies 31(1): 57-80.

Seidensticker, T. (1986). Das Verbum sawwama: Ein Beitrag zum Problem der Homonymenscheidung im Arabischen. In Kommission bei der C. H. Beck'schen Verlagsbuchhandlung Munchen; vorgelegt von Herrn Anton Spitaler am 7. Nov. 1986. Munich, Verl. der Bayerischen Akad. der Wiss.

Sekelj, T. (1981). “The language problem of the non-aligned movement and its possible solution.” Esperanto Documents 26A: 1-9.

Selim, G. D. (1992). Arabic-Engilsh and English-Arabic Dictionaries in Library of Congress.

Selkirk, E. (1981). Epenthesis and Degenerate Syllables in Cairene Arabic. Theoretical Issues in the Grammar of Semitic Languages. H. Borer and J. Aoun. Cambridge, MA, MIT Dept. of Linguistics. 3: 209-232.

Sellheim, R. (1984). “'Familiennamen' im islamischen Mittelalter: Eine Skizze.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 375-384.

Semaan , K. I. H. (1986). “Introduction to Arabic Linguistic Studies.” Henry Sweet Social Newsletter 5(1986 May): 12.

Semah, D. (1983). “The Rhythmical Function of the Watid and the Fasila.” Journal of the Semitic Studies 28(no. 2, 1983 Autumn): 321-335.

Semah, D. (1984). “Quantity and Syllabic Parity in the Hispano-Arabic Muwassah.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 31(1): 80-107.

Serikoff, N. I. (1987). “Einige Aspekte der griechischen Grammatik des Bar Hebraus: Griechische Lehnworter in der 'Kurzgefassten Geschichte der Dynastien'.” Jahrbuch der Osterreichischen Byzantinistik 37: 101-135.

Seror, S. (1986). “Notes on the onomastics of French Jews in the Middle Ages (Notes d’onomastique des juifs de France au Moyen Age).” Revue des etudes juives 145(3-4): 315-46.

Sethom, H. and T. Bachrouch (1989). “A propos du Dictionnaire de geographie (franco-arabe).” IBLA: Revue de l'Institut des Belles Lettres Arabes 52(2): 327-332.

Sgroi, S. C. (1981). “Inverse Allocution in the Performative Model.” Lingua e Stile 16(1): 3-11.

Sgroi, S. C. (1985). Agglutination et deglutination de l'article arabe dans les arabismes espagnols et siciliens. Actes du XVIIeme Cong. Internat. de Ling. et Philol. Romanes, VII (Aix-en-Provence, 29 aout-3 sept. 1983). Contacts de langues: Discours oral. J.-C. Bouvier. Aix-en-Provence, University de Provence: 141-151.



Shaikh, S. (1983). Handbook of English-Arabic for Professionals. Bombay, Oxford University Press.

Sharbatov, G. (1988). “On the Tripartite Functional Paradigm of the Arabic Language: Literary Language, Dialects, Spoken Languages.” Indian Journal of Linguistics 15(2): 189-197.

Sharma, V. A. (1981). Syntactic Errors as Indices of Developing Language Profieciency in Arabic Speakers Writing English at the Intermidiate and Advanced Levels of English as a Second Language, Indiana University.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3986:A

Shatura , V. V. (1983). “The history of the name Brazil.” Vestnik Moskovskogo Universiteta, Filologiya 38(9(3)): 79-82.

Shawish, B. (1984). Some Aspects of the Syntax of Object Complements in Literary Arabic, Indiana University.

Shawish, B. (1984). “Ibn Sina's Treatise on Phonetica and the Supposed Influence of the Ancient Greeks and Indians.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 1.1: 113-126.

Shboul, L. A. (1981). “Some problems of learning to read English encountered by native Arabic readers.” Australian Review of Applied Linguistics 4(1): 48-58.

Shboul, A. M. H. (1983). “'Having' in Arabic.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 11: 24-47.

Shehadeh, H. (1983). “Kunt 'istri in Kufir-Yasif Dialect.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 11: 79-83.

Sheikh Ibrahim, A. L. M. (1986). The interlanguage stress phonology of Arab learners of English: influence of universals as well as dialect, distance, and task, Indiana University of Pennsylvania.Dissertation Abstracts International 47:2569A

Sheir, A. A. (1981). An Analytic Study of the Errors Made in English Sentence Patterns and Their Transformations by Egyptian Prospective Teachers of English as a Foreign Language (EFL), The Pennsylvania State University.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:3141A

Sheynin, H. Y. (1982). “An Unknown Jewish Arabic-Castilian Glossary.” efarad: Revista de Estudios Hebraicos, Sefardies y de Oriente Proximo 42: 223-241.

Shivtiel, A. (1985). “Languages in contact: the contribution of the Arabic language to the revival of Hebrew.” Journal of Semitic Studies 30(1): 95-113.

Shlonsky, U. (1992). “Resumptive Pronouns as a Last Resort.” Linguistic Inquiry 23(3): 443-468.

Shohet, N. (1984). “Niv yehudi be-ge'ulato.” Leshonenu La'Am: Kuntresim 'Amamiyyim le-'Inyane Lashon 35(3): 91-96.

Shorrab, G. A.-E. -. J. (1981). Models of Socially Significant Linguistic Variation: The Case of Palestinian Arabic, State University of New York at Buffalo.Dissertation Abstracts International 42:5109A

Shorrab, G. (1984). “Garvin's Standardization Model and Arabic: A Case in Language Planning.” Journal of College of Arts, King Saud University 11(2): 211-223.

Shorrab, G. A.-E. -. J. (1986). “Bilingual patterns of an Arabic-English speech community.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 61: 79-88.

Sibley, E. H. (1990). “Alphabets & Languages.” Communications of the ACM 33(5): 488.

Sidarus, A. Y. (1990). “Onomastica Aegyptiaca: The Tradition of Tematic Lexicography in Egypt through the Afes and Languages.” Histoire Epistemologie Langage 12(1): 7-19.

Sieny, M. E. i. (1978). The Syntax of Urban Hijazi Arabic. London, Longman Group Ltd.

Sieny, M. E. (1985). “Scientific terminology in the Arab world: production, co-ordination, dissemination.” Meta 30(2): 155-61.



Singer, H.-R. (1980). Conquista und Reconquista im Spiegel spanisch-arabischer Ortsnamen. Erlanger Ortsnamen-Kolloquium: Ortsnamen als Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft. R. Schutzeichel and F. Tichy. Heidelberg, Winter: 119-130.

Singer, H.-R. (1980). “Ortsnamenkunde und Dialektologie im muslimischen Spanien: Studien zu den Ortsnamen von al-Andalus, II.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 136-157.

Singer, H.-R. (1981). “Zum arabischen Dialekt von Valencia.” Oriens. 27-28: 317-323.

Skousen, R. (1989). Analogical Modeling of Language. Dordrecht, Kluwer.

Slama, F. B. (1985). “The enigma of the concept of sex in Arabic (L’Enigme du concept de sexe dans de langue arabe).” Pueples Mediterraneens/Mediterranean Peoples 33: 155-62.

Smadi, O. M. (1979). The Acquisition of the Jordanian Arabic Interrogation and Negation by a Three-Year-Old Native Speaker of Jordanian Arabic, The University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 40:5845A

Smart, J. R. (1990). “Pidginization in Gulf Arabic: A First Report.” Anthropological Linguistics 32(1-2): 83-119.

Smetanka, T. (1984). “Some Linguistic Means Characteristic of Poetic Texts in Arabic.” Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies 52(2): 160-166.

Smith, B. (1987). Arabic Speakers. Learner English: A Teacher's Guide to Interference and Other Problems. M. Swan and B. Smith. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press: 142-157.

Somekh, S. (1979). “The Emergence of Two Sets of Stylistic Norms in the Early Literary Translation into Modern Arabic Prose.” Ha-Sifrut-Literature 8(28): 52-57.

Somekh, S. (1981). “The dilemma of language in Tawfiq Al-Hakim’s plays.” Ha-Sifrut-Literature 30-31: 88-94.

Somekh, S. (1981). “The Emergence of Two Sets of Stylistic Norms in the Early Literary Translation into Modern Arabic Prose.” Poetics Today 2(1981 Summer-Autumn): 193-200.

Soravia, G. (1988). “Maltese as a Linguistic Test.” Archivio Glottologico Italiano 73(1): 55-57.

Sotiropoulos, D. (1982). “Social roots of Modern Greek diglossia.” Language Problems and Language Planning 6(1): 1-28.

Souaiaia, M. (1990). “Language, Education and Politics in the Maghreb.” Language, Culture, and Curriculum 3(2): 109-123.

Sounkalo, J. (1990). Relationship between Second Language Instruction and Lexical Attrition and Deficiency in the Native Languages of Mauritanians, University of Pittsburgh.Dissertation Abstracts International 52:527A

Sourati, B. (1985). “The Language of the State and Political Reality in Lebanon.” Mediterranean Peoples 33(Oct-Dec): 65-78.

Souriau, C. (1980). Arabisation and French Culture in the Maghreb. Decolonisation and After: The British and French Experience. W. H. Morris-Jones and G. Fischer. London, Cass: 310-329.

Spaulding, J. L. (1988). “The Democratic Philosophers of the Medieval Sudan: The Pig.” Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika (SUGIA) 9: 247-268.

Spitaler, A. (1989). Al-qalamu ahadu l-lisanaini. Vorgelegt am 9. Mai 1986. Munich, Bayerische Akad. der Wiss. in Kommission bei Beck.

Spitta, W. (1880). Grammatik des arabischen Vulgärdialektes von Aegypten. Leipzig, J.C. Hinrichs.

Spolsky, B. (1991). The Languages of Jerusalem. Oxford & New York, Clarendon Press & Oxford University Press.

Srage, M. N. (1988). “La Diglossie et le bilinguisme scolaire a Beyrouth.” Cahiers de l'Institut de Linguistique de Louvain 14(1-2): 71-73.



Steger, H.-A. (1980). Reconquista/Conquista und Namenubertragung. Erlanger Ortsnamen-Kolloquium: Ortsnamen als Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft. R. Schutzeichel and F. Tichy. Heidelberg, Winter: 131-137.

Stein, G. (1990). “The Emerging Role of English in the Dictionaries of Renaissance Europe.” Folia Linguistica Historica 9(1): 29-138.

Steiner, R. (1977). “The Case for Fricative-Laterals in Proto-Semitic.” American Oriental Society 59.

Stetkevych, S. P. (1986). “The Ritha of Ta’abbata Sharran: a study of blood-vengeance in early Arabic poetry.” Journal of Semitic Studies 31(1): 27-45.

Stetkevych, J. (1986). “Name and Epithet: The Philology and Semiotics of Animal Nomenclature in Early Arabic Poetry.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 45(2): 89-124.

Stetkevych, J. (1989). “Arabic Hermeneutical Terminology: Paradox and the Production of Meaning.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 48(2): 81-96.

Stevens, P. (1980). “Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes: The Case of Tunesia.” Civilisations 30(1-2): 37-57.

Stevens, P. B. (1983). “Ambivalence, Modernisation and Language Attitudes: French and Arabic in Tunisia.” Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 4(2-3): 101-114.

Stewart, E. C. (1983). Talking Culture: Language in the Function of Communication. The First Delaware Symposium on Language Studies: Selected Papers. R. J. Di Pietro, W. Frawley and A. Wedel. Newark, University of Delaware Press: 23-34.

Stewart, F. H. (1987). “A Bedouin narrative from Central Sinai.” Journal of Arabic Lingusitics 16: 44-92.

Stillman, N. A. (1981). Some Notes on the Judaeo-Arabic Dialect of Sefrou (Morocco). Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His Students, Colleagues, and Friends. S. Morag. Jerusalem, Magnes Press: 231-251.

Stock, K. (1989). “The Metaphor-A Blossom in the Meadow: On the Translation of Linguistic Images from Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 131-140.

Stocks, P. (1989). “Edward William Lane and His Arabic-English 'Thesaurus'.” The British Library Journal 15(1): 23-34.

Stoetzer, W. (1981). Stress in Koranic Arabic: Its Relation to 'i'rab. Proceedings of the Ninth Congress of the Union Europeenne des Arabisants et Islamisants, Amsterdam, 1st to 7th September 1978. R. Peters. Leiden, Brill: 261-269.

Stoetzer, W. (1982). “Some Observations on Quantity in Arabic Metrics.” Journal of Arabic Literature 13: 66-75.

Stromsta, C., M. N. Kotby, et al. (1988). “Evidence of Coarticulation in Arabic.” Folia Phoniatrica: International Journal of Phoniatrics, Speech Therapy and Communication Pathology 40(4): 183-189.

Sturm, R. (1987). Some basic linguistic action verbs of Egyptian Arabic and Israeli Hebrew. Linguistic Action: Some Empirical-Conceptual Studies. Norwood NJ, Ablex Publishing Corp: 107-24.

Suaieh, S. (1980). Aspects of Relative Clauses in Arabic, Indiana University.

Suleiman, S. M. (1985). “Jordanian Arabic between diglossia and bilingualism: linguistic analysis.” Pragmatics and Beyond 6(8): 1-131.

Suleiman, S. M. (1989). “On the Pragmatics of Subject Preposing in Standard Arabic.” Language Sciences 11(2): 215-235.

Suleiman, S. M. (1990). “The Semantic Functions of Object Deletion in Classical Arabic.” Language Sciences 12(2-3): 255-266.

Suleiman, M. Y. (1990). “Sibawaihi's 'Parts of Speech' According to Zajjaji: A New Interpretation.” Journal of Semitic Studies 35(2): 245-263.

Sussman, H. M., K. A. Hoemeke, et al. (1993). “A Cross-Linguistic Investigation of Locus Equations as a Phonetic Descriptor for Place of Articulation.” Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 94(3): 1256-1268.



Swaffar, J. K. (1989). “Rethinking Roles: Western and Eastern Languages in the Foreign Language Academy.” Journal of the Chinese Language Teachers Association 24(2): 123-134.

Swed, A. (1981). “Ordering and directionality of iterative rules in the Tripoli dialect of Libyan Arabic.” Al-‘Arabiyya 14(1-2): 38-50.

Swed, A. A. (1982). The Historical Development of the Arabic Verb, University of Washington.Dissertation Abstracts International 43:1960A

Swiggers, P. (1981). “A Phonological Analysis of the Harsusi Consonants.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(June-Sept.): 358-361.

Syeed, S. M. (1986). “Islamization of linguistics.” The American Journal of Islamic Social Sciences 3(1): 77-87.

Szende, T. (1979). “On the Search for Unifying Phonological Quantities.” Magyar Nyelv 75(4): 395-405.

Taft, R. and D. Cahill (1989). “Mother Tongue Maintenance in Lebanese Immigrant Families in Australia.” Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 10(2): 129-143.

Taha, T. A. M. (1990). “The Arabicisation of Higher Education: The Case of Khartoum University.” Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development 11(4): 291-305.

Taine-Cheikh, C. (1984). “Un Example de creativite lexicale: L'Elatif en hassaniyya (dialecte arabe de Mauritanie).” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 31(3): 274-305.

Taine-Cheikh, C. (1991). “Le Vent et le devant: De l'orientation chez les Maures.” Journal Asiatique 279(1-2): 93-136.

Talaat, H. M. (1987). “A government-binding analysis of VP sentential complements in Egyptian Arabic.” Journal of the Atlantic Provinces Linguistic Association 9: 84-99.

Talaat, H. M. (1987). The verb phrase in Egyptian Arabic, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:382A

Talmon, R. (1981). “Appositival 'atf: An Inquiry into the History of the Syntactic Category.” Arabic: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 28(2-3 June-Sept): 278-292.

Talmon, R. (1982). “Nahwiyyun in Sibawayhi's Kitab.” Zeitschrift für Arabische LInguistik 8, 1982: 12-38.

Talmon, R. (1984). “A Problematic Passage in Sibawaihi's al-Kitab and the Authenticity of Ahbar about the Early History of Arabic Grammatical Thinking.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 104(4): 691-701.

Talmon, R. (1985). “Who Was the First Arab Grammarian? A New Approach to an Old Problem.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 15: 128-a45.

Talmon, R. (1987). “Schacht's Theory in the Light of Recent Discoveries Concerning the Origins of Arabic Grammar.” Studia Islamica 65(1987): 31-50.

Talmon, R. (1990). The Philosophizing Farra': An Interpretation of an Obscure Saying Attributed to the Grammarian Ta'lab. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 265-279.

Talmoudi, F. (1984). “Notes on the syntax of the Arabic dialect of Susa.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 12: 48-85.

Talmoudi, F. (1984). The Diglossic Situation in North Africa: A Study of Classical Arabic/Dialectal Arabic Diglossia with Sample Text in 'Mixed Arabic'. Gothenburg, Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis.

Talmoudi, F. (1986). A Morphosemantic Study of Romance Verbs in the Arabic Dialects of Tunis, Susa and Sfax, I: Derived Themes II, III, V, VI and X. Gothenburg, Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis.

Tapiero, N. (1984). “Methode d'analyse semiologique du discours arabe moderne.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 31(3): 239-273.



Tarone, E. (1984). “The role of the syllable in interlanguage phonology.” Studies in Descriptive Linguistics 13: 63-72.

Tarone, E. (1985). “Variability in interlanguage use: a study of style-shifting in morphology and syntax.” Language Learning 35(3): 373-403.

Tayash, F. A. and K. K. Ayouby (1992). Arab-American Media: Past and Present. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 162-183 349pp.

Tekinay, A. (1981). “Person-denoting suffixes in German and Turkish morphology: a contrastive analysis.” Zielsprach Deutsch 3(July-Sept): 29-34.

Tekinay, A. (1984). “German and Turkish as reflected in their foreign-and loanword problems.” Muttersprache 94(3-4): 290-9.

Tel, S. A. and D. J. Cunningham (1986). “The Independence/Interdependence of Knowledge in the Bilingual Memory.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 3.1: 1-17.

Tel, S. (1988). “Bilingual Linguistic Referents in Cognitive Processing.” International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies 5.1: 33-41.

Tel, S. A. (1990). Bilingual Linguistic Memory. Papers from 1st Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 257-270.

Temple, C. M. (1989). “Digit Dyslexia: A Category-Specific Disorder in Development Dyscalculia.” Cognitive Neuropsychology 6(1): 93-116.

Tenishev, E. R. (1989). “On the Kirghiz Literary Language of the Prenational Period.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 38(5): 32-40.

Testen, D. (1985). “The significance of Aramaic r <*n.” Journal of Near Eastern Studies 44(2): 143-6.

Testen, D. (1987). Vowel Structures and the Arabic Verb. CLS 23: Parasession on Autosegmental and Metrical Phonology. Chicago, Chicago Linguistic Society. 23: 363-73.

Testen, D. (1992). Extra-Arabic Affiliations of k-Yemeni. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins: 77-90.

Testen, D. (1993). On the Development of the Energic Suffixes. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 293-312.

Testen, D. (1994). On the Development of the Arabic Subjunctive. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 151-166.

Thalji, A.-M. I. (1986). “Marked vs. unmarked structures in modern written Arabic (Part I).” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 106-26.

Thalji, A.-M. I. (1986). “The absence of VP in Arabic basic unmarked order (part II).” Al-‘Arabiyya 19(1-2): 127-136.

Thalji, A.-M. I. (1988). “Head-Modifier Agreement in Case in Arabic.” Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies 56(1): 42-53.

Theilig, R. (1989). “Polysemy in Arabic: Observations Concerning the Arabic Verb.” Linguistische Studien 189: 81-92.

Thelwall, R. and J. Dickins (1985). “(Nubi Creole Language).” Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 7(1): 92-97.

Theodoridis, D. (1987). “On the Ethonym *al-Aznakiya (Zum Volksnamen *al-Aznakiya).” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 16: 129.

Thiry, J. (1985). “Modern Arabic, Classical Arabic.” Universite Libre de Bruxelles Rapport d’Activites de l’Institut de Phonetique 20: 95-126.

Thiry, J. (1989). “The Weak Consonants of Arabic: Conservation and Mutations.” Universite Libre de Bruxelles Rapport d'Activities de l'Institute de Phonetique 23-24(June): 139-185.



Thiry, J. (1990). “Synthetic and Analytic Genitive in Tunisian Arabic.” University Libre de Bruxelles Rapport d'Activites de l'Institut de Phonetique 25: 1-25.

Thomason, S. G. and A. Elgibali (1986). “Before the Lingua Franca: Pidginized Arabic in the Eleventh Century A.D.” Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics 68(4): 317-349.

Thompson-Panos, K. and M. Thomas-Ruzic (1983). “The Least You Should Know about Arabic: Implications for the ESL Writing Instructor.” TESOL Quarterly 17(4): 609-623.

Thornburg, L. (1980). “Arabic loan phonology: the assimilation of English lexical items.” Linguistics 18(5-6(231-232)): 523-42.

Tilmatine, M. (1989). “Theories on the Origin of the Berbers.” Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 18(June): 83-89.

Ting-Toomey, S. and F. Korzenny, Eds. (1989). Language, Communication, and Culture: Current Directions. International and Intercultural Communication Annual. Newbury Park, Sage Publications, Inc.

Toll, C. (1984). “Dialektale Zuge in al-Hamdani's Kitab al-gawharatayn.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 13: 16-26.

Tomback, R. S. (1983). “Archaic Features in the Iraqi Arabic Dialect.” Journal of Northwest Semitic Languages 11: 135-137.

Tomback, R. S. (1983). “Random Notes on the Hebrew-Arabic Lexicons.” Journal of Northwest Semitic Languages 11: 139-141.

Tomback, R. S. (1984). “An Unrecognized Maltese West-Semitic Isogloss.” Journal of Northwest Semitic Languages 12: 121-123.

Tomiche, N. (1982). Remarques sur la langue et l'ecriture en Egypte, 1805-1882. Groupe de Recherches et d'Etudes sur le Proche-Orient. Paris, CNRS: 299-317.

Toporov, L. I. and S. K. Mustafa (1987). “Iazyk zhestov arabov.” Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom 5: 37-40.

Torreblanca, M. (1982). “Hispano-latin /s/: Arabic evidence.” Romance Philology 35(3): 447-63.

Torreblanca, M. (1983). “La geminacion de l y n latinas en el dialecto mozarabe.” La Coronica: Spanish Medieval Language and Literature Journal and Newsletter 11(2): 300-306.

Torreblanca, M. (1994). On Hispano-Arabic Historical Phonology: Latin and Romance evidence. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 37-62.

Touratier, C. (1989). “Structure de la phrase simple en arabe.” Bulletin de la Societe de Linguistique de Paris 84(1): 345-359.

Trabelsi, C. (1991). “De quelques aspects du langage des femmes de Tunis.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 87: 87-98.

Traugott, E. C. (1985). Confrontation and Association. Papers from the 6th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. J. Fisiak. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xxiv: 515-526.

Troupeau, G. (1981). “The "Partes Orationis" in the Kitab al-'Usul of Ibn al-Sarraj.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 379-88.

Troupeau, G. (1981). “Les 'Partes Ortionis' dans le Kitab Al-Usul d'Ibn Al Sarraj.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 379-388.

Troupeau, G. (1981). “La Logique d'Ibn Al-Muqaffa et les Origines de la Grammaire Arabe.” Arabic 28(2-3): 242-250.

Troupeau, G. (1985). “Les Livres des Definitions Grammaticales dans La Lexicographie Arabe.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 15: 146-171.

Troupeau, G. (1986). “Problems posed by the translation of old Arabic medical terms into Modern French.” Meta 31(1): 11-15.

Tsoneva, D. (1990). “Kontrastiven analiz na bulgarskiia i arabskiia konsonantizum i izvodi za praktikata.” Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie 15(6): 28-32.



Tucker, A. (1984). Maltese and Nubi: Two 'Fringe Semitic' Languages. Papers from 3rd International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics. J. Bynonv. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xi: 405-412.

Tushyeh, H. Y. (1988). “Transfer and Related Strategies in the Acquisition of English Relative Clauses by Adult Arab Learners.” Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics 23: 69-86.

Tushyeh, H. Y., E. D. Lawson, et al. (1989). “Palestian First Names: An Introduction.” Names: Journal of the American Name Society 37(3): 245-264.

Tushyeh, H. Y. and R. W. Hamdallah (1992). “Palestinian Surnames Derived from Nicknames.” Names: Journal of the American Name Society 40(4): 237-252.

Tweissi, A. I. (1987). Language simplification in foreigner talk and second language development, University of Michigan.Dissertation Abstracts International 48:383A

Tweissi, A. L. (1988). ‘Foreigner Talk’: Evidence for the universality of language simplification. Perspective in Arabic Linguistics. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. 2: 296-326.

Tweissi, A. I. (1990). 'Foreigner Talk' in Arabic: Evidence for the Universality of Language Simplification. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II. M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xiv.

Ul-Haq, Z. (1984). Negation in Arabic: a Morpho-syntactic and Semantic Description, Indiana University.

Ullmann, M. (1981). Die Bedeutung des Adjektivs Ag'a. Festschrift for Ihsan 'Abbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. Studia Arabica et Islamica. W. Al-Qadi. Beirut, American Univ. of Beirut. xv: 455-471.

Ullmann, M. (1989). Das arabische Nomen generis. Gottingen, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Urvoy, M.-T. (1989). “Note de philologie mozarabe.” Arabica: Revue d'Etudes Arabes 36(2): 235-236.

Ushakov, V. D. (1980). “On several stylistic figures in the works of 'Abdalqahir Jurjani'.” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 29(5): 64-73.

Ushakov, V. D. (1992). “Nekotorye Voprosy Vnutriiazykovogo Sopostavitelnogo Analiza Frazeologischkikh Rechenii Arabskogo Klassicheskogo Iazyka.” Voprosy Iazykoznaniia 2(1992 Mar-Apr): 100-111.

Vaane, E. (1982). “Subjective Estimation of Speech Rate.” Phonetica 39(2-3): 136-149.

Valdes Bernal, S. (1984). “About the remnants of Insular Aruak in Cuban Spanish (En torno a los remanentes del aruaco insular en el espanol de Cuba).” Islas 77: 5-22.

Van Deusen-Scholl, P. L. F. (1988). A Sociolinguistic and Conversational Analysis among Second Generation Moroccans in the Netherlands, University of Florida.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:129A

Van Hoof, H. (1981). “Scientific translation: A recent phenomenon?” Le Langage et l’Homme 46: 25-30.

Van Lier, H. (1989). “Spanish and the Grill.” Le Francais dans le Monde 29(228): 44-48.

Vanbruinessen, M. (1990). “Kitab Kuning - Books in Arabic Script Used in the Pesantren Milieu.” Bijdragen Tot de Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde 146(2-3): 226-269.

Vanhove, M. (1987). La Litterature Maltaise. Encyclopedie de l'Islam. VI: 284-288.

Vanhove, M. (1987). “Remarques sur quelques auxiliaries et particules verbales en maltais.” Materiaux arabes et sudarabiques 1: 35-51.

Vanhove, M. (1988). “Des Ghana dans la vie quotidienne a gozo.” Cahiers de litterature orale(23): 109-126.

Vanhove, M. (1990). Morphosyntaxe et Stylistique en Maltais: Le Systeme Verbal et la Phrase Nominale, University of Paris.



Vanhove, M. and D. Cohen (1991). “La Cantilene Maltiase du Xveme Siecle: Remarques Linguistiques.” Comptes Rendus du G.L.E.C.S. XXIX-XXX(198401986): 177-220.

Vanhove, M. (1991). “Un Manuscrit inedit de Georges S. Col: Le Supplement au Dictionnaire Maltais.” Materiaux Arbes et Sudarabiques(3): 137-225.

Vanhove, M. (1991). Le Rituel du Crespuscle. Paris, Editions Noel Blandin.

Vanhove, M. (1991). The Island of Malta, a Crossroad for Influences? The Case of Auxilairy Verbs. Languages of the Mediterranean, Malta.

Vanhove, M. (1991-92). “On the Survival of (S) in Maltese Idiolect at Mtahleb in Malta.” Journal of Afroasiatic Languages 3: 22-34.

Vanhove, M. (1993). La Langue Maltaise: Etudes Syntaxiques d'un Dialecte Arabe "Peripherique". Wiesbaden, Harrasowitz.

Vanhove, M. (1993). “Note Sur le Dialecte Qeltu de Dale (province de Lahej, Yemen).” Materiaux Arabes et Sudarabiques(5): 165-190.

Vanhove, M. (1993). La Dialectologie du Maltais et Son HIstoire. Paris, CNRS.

Vardar , B. (1985). “Zones of terminological innovation: Observation on the Turkish model.” Linguistice 21: 297-308.

Vermeer, A. (1988). Socio-Cultural Factors and Second Language Acquisition of Turkish and Moroccan Children. Language Attitudes in the Dutch Language Area. R. van Hout and U. Knops. Providence, Foris: 143-156.

Veronique, D. (1984). The Acquisition and Use of Aspects of French Morphosyntax by Native Speakers of Arabic Dialects (North Africa). Second Languages: A Cross-Linguistic Perspective. R. W. Andersen. Rowley, MA, Newbury House: 191-213.

Veronique, D. (1986). L'Apprentissage du francais par des travailleurs marocains et les processus de pidginisation et de creolisation. Actes du 5e colloque internat. Acquisition d'une langue etrangere: Perspectives et recherches. A. Giacomi and D. Veronique. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 559-584.

Veronique, D. (1989). “L'Apprentissage du francais par des travailleurs arabophones et la genese des creoles 'francais'.” Langage et Societe 50-51: 9-37.

Versteegh, K. (1980). “The international project "Onomasticon Arabicum".” BIOR XXXVII(no. 5/6): 291-294.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1980). “The Origin of the Term 'Qiyas' in Arabic Grammar.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 4: 7-30.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1980). Hellenistic Education and the Origin of Arabic Grammar. Papers from the Internat. Conf. on the Hist. of Lang. Sciences (Ottawa, 28-31 Aug. 1978). Progress in Linguistic Historiography. K. Koerner and R. H. Robins. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 333-344.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1981). “A dissenting grammarian: Qutrub on declension.” Historiographia Linguistica 8(2-3): 403-29.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1982). Structural Change and Pidginization in the History of the Arabic Language. Papers from the 5th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. A. Ahlqvist. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 362-373.

Versteegh, K. (1983). “History of Eastern linguistics in the Soviet Union.” Historiographia Linguistica 10(3): 289-307.

Versteegh, C. H. M., K. Koerner, et al., Eds. (1983). The History of Linguistics in the Near East. Studies in the History of Linguistics. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1983). “Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 10; 11: 86-89; 84-86.

Versteegh, K. (1984). Pidginization and Creolization: the Case of Arabic. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1984). “Current BIbliography on the History of Arabic Grammar.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 12: 86-89.

Versteegh, K. (1984). “Word Order in Uzbekistan Arabic and Universal Grammar.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 443-453.



Versteegh, K. (1985). “The Development of Argumentation in Arabic Grammar: The Declension of the Dual and the Plural.” Zeitschrift für ARabische Linguistik 15: 152-173.

Versteegh, K. (1985). La 'Grande Etymologie' d'Ibn Ginni. La Linguistique fantastique. S. Auroux, J.-C. Chevalier, N. Jacques-Chaquin and C. Marchello-Nizia. Paris, Ed. Denoel: 44-50.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1985). “Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 14: 79-81.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1987). “Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar.” Zeitschrift für arabische Linguistik 16(1987): 130-133.

Versteegh, K. (1987). Marginality in the Arab Grammatical Tradition. Proc. of Third Internatioanl Conf. on History of Language Sciences. Papers in the History of Linguistics. H. Aarsleff, L. G. Kelly and H.-J. Niederehe. Amsterdam, Benjamins. xxv.

Versteegh, K. (1989). “'Early' and 'Late' Grammarians in the Arab Tradition: The Morphology of the Hollow Verbs.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 20: 9-22.

Versteegh, K. and M. Carter, Eds. (1990). Studies in the History of Arabic, Grammar, II. Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of the Language Sciences III: Studies in the History of the Language. Amsterdam, Benjamins.

Versteegh, K. (1990). Freedom of the Speaker? The Term Ittisa' and Related Notions in Arabic Grammar. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 281-293.

Versteegh, C. H. M. (1993). “Arabic Grammar & Quranic Exegesis in Early Islam.” Studies in Semitic Languages and Linguistics 19(8).

Versteegh, K. (1993). “Leveling in the Sudan: From Arabic Creole to Arabic Dialect.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 99: 65-79.

Vincent, G. B. (1986). Juba Arabic from a Bari Perspective. Current Approaches to African Linguistics, III. G. J. Dimmendaal. Dordrecht, Foris: 71-78.

Vinet, M.-T. (1985). “Les Melanges grammaticaux arabe-francais: Les Faits et le cadre theorique.” Presence Francophone: Revue Internationale de Langue et de Litterature 27: 89-99.

Vion, R. (1986). L’ Activite de reformulation dans les echanges entre linguistes et apprenants nonguides (migrants maroicains). Acquisition d’une Langue Etrangere: Perspectives et Recherches. A. Giacomi and D. Veronique. Aix-en-Provence, Univ. de Provence: 231-247.

Virolle-Souibes, M. (1985). “Gestes emblematiques masculins et mixtes a Alger et en Kabylie.” Geste & Image 4: 69-107.

Vitale-Brovarone, A. (1989). “On the etymology of guai.” Archivio Glottologico Italiano 74(2): 205-209.

Vitestam, G. (1984). “Sirr: A Lexicographical Essay on a Word with Various Nuances in Arabic and Islam.” Orientalia Suecana 33-35: 455-462.

Vycichl, W. (1988). Arabisch naq-a.t 'Kamelstute': Ein altes passives Partizip: Ein Beitrag zur vergleichenden Hamitosemitistik. FOCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. Y. L. Arbeitman. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 483-489.

Wagner, D. A. and A. Lotfi (1983). “Learning to Read by 'Rote'.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 42: 111-121.

Wagner, D. A., J. E. Spratt, et al. (1989). “Does Learning to Read in a Second Language Always Put the Child at a Disadvantage? Some Counterevidence from Morocco.” Applied Psycholinguistics 10(1): 31-48.

Wahba, W. (1984). Wh-constructions in Egyptian Arabic, University of Illnois-Urbana.Dissertation Abstracts International 45:2086A

Wahba, W. A.-F. B. (1985). “Some aspects of LF movement in Iraqi Arabic.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 309-14.



Wahba, W. A.-F. B. (1991). LF Movement in Iraqi Arabic. Logical Structure and Linguistic Structure: Cross-Linguistic Perspectives. C.-T. J. Huang and R. May. Dordrecht, Kluwer. 28, 1991: 253-276.

Walbridge, L. S. (1992). Arabic in the Dearborn Mosques. The Arabic Language in America. A. Rouchdy. Detroit, Wayne State University Press: 184-204.

Wald, B. (1985). “The influence of Arabic on the syntax of Swahili discourse (Part 1: verbal and nominal strategies in temporal clause subordination).” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 315-17.

Wald, P., A. Daoudi, et al. (1991). “L'Enchainement question-reponse dans une enquete sur la denomination des couleurs.” Langage et Societe 55: 61-82.

Waldmann, A. (1989). “Genitive Combination or Prepostional Group-A Structural-Semantic Study of the Arabic Nominal Group.” Linguistische Studien 189: 29-39.

Walter, H. (1982). “Why phonological tables? An applications to the consonants of the Lebanese Arabic.” La Linguistique 18(2): 21-31.

Walter, H. (1982). “Pourquoi des tableaux phonologiques? Application aux consonnes de l'arabe libanais.” La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Internationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle/Journal of the International So 18.

Walters, S. K. (1989). Social Change and Linguistic Variation in Korba, a Small Tunisian Town, University of Texas at Austin.Dissertation Abstracts International 50:2884A

Walters, K. (1991). Women, Men and Linguistic Variation in the Arab World. Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III. B. Comrie and M. Eid. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 12: 199-229.

Walters, K. (1992). Toward a Sociolinguistic Description of (u:) in Korba Arabic: Defining linguistic variables in contact situations and relic areas. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV. E. Broselow, M. Eid and J. McCarthy. Amsterdam & Phildelphia, John Benjamins: 181-218.

Wang, Y. (1993). “A Study of the Relation between Attributives and Head Words in Arabic.” Waiguoyu 4(86): 73-78.

Wardhaugh, R. (1987). Languages In Competition: Dominance, Diversity, and Decline. Oxford, Basil Blackwell Ltd.

Wasserstein, D. (1984). “Gamasa in Taha Husayn.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 13: 93.

Watson, J. (1992). “A Lexicon of Cairene Horse Terminology.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 37(no. 2): 247-303.

Webb, C. (1982). “A historical source for the geminate roots in Arabic.” Glossa: An International Journal of Linguistics 16(1): 13-27.

Weber, G. (1987). “Divehi.” Language Monthly 43: 27.

Weber, G. (1987). “Tamashek and Tifinagh.” Language Monthly 50: 11-12.

Webster, S. K. (1986). “Arabic Proverbs and Related Forms.” Proverbium 3: 179-194.

Webster, R. (1991). “Notes on the Dialect and Way of Life of the Al Wahiba Bedouin of Oman.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 54(3): 473-485.

Weill , C. (1987). “This agitation of language (Cette agitation de la langue).” Les Langues Neo-Latines 81(1(260)): 197-201.

Weiss, B. (1984). “Language and Tradition in Medieval Islam: The Question of al-Tariq ila ma'rifat al-lugha.” Der Islam: Zeitschrift für Geschichte und Kultur des Islamischen Orients 61(1): 91-99.

Weiss, B. (1985). “Subject and Predicate in the Thinking of the Arabic Philologists.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 105(no. 4): 605-622.

Weitzman, M. (1987). “Statistical Patterns in Hebrew and Arabic Roots.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland 1(2): 15-22.



Welden, A. (1980). “Stress in Cairo Arabic.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 10(2): 99-120.

Werner, O. (1981). “Contrastive Phonology: German Against an Egyptian-Arabic Background.” Deutsche Sprache 3(Sept): 193-223.

Weryho, J. W. (1983). “Modern Tajiki Persian: Gharbzadagi of a different kind.” Nationalities Papers 11(1): 27-40.

Wettinger, G. (1993). “Plurilingualism and Cultural Change in Medieval Malta.” Mediterranean Language Review 6-7: 144-160.

Wexler, P. (1980). “Zhunyanese (Dungan) as an Islamic and Soviet language.” Journal of Chinese Linguistics 8(2): 294-304.

Wexler, P. (1983). “Notes on the Iraqi Judeo-Arabic of eastern Asia.” Journal of Semitic Studies 28(2): 337-354.

Wickens, G. M. (1980). Arabic Grammar: A First Workbook. New York, Cambridge University Press.

Wild , S. (1980). Die konjunktion hatta mit dem indikative imperfekt im klassischen Arabisch. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild: 204-23.

Williams, M. P. (1989). A Comparison of the Textual Structures of Arabic and English Written Texts: A Study in the Comparative Orality of Arabic, University of Leeds (U.K.).Dissertation Abstracts International 50:3218A

Windfuhr, G. L. (1985). “A spatial model for tense, aspect, and mood.” Folia Linguistica 19(3-4): 415-61.

Windfuhr, G. L. (1989). “Metrics, Licenses, and Historical Linguistics.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 109(2): 255-281.

Wisbey, R., Ed. (1971). The Computer in Literary and Linguistic Research: Papers from a Cambridge Symposium. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Wise, H. (1983). “Functionally Motivated Rules in Tunisian Phonology.” Journal of Linguistics, Vol. 19: 165-181.

Wittig, S. (1981). “Der Einfluss von Streckformen auf die Satzstruktur im Arabischen.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 34: 84-101.

Wittig, S. (1989). “On the Linguistic Realization of the Communicative Intention of Request in Modern Arabic.” Linguistische Studien 189: 54-68.

Wittig, S. (1989). “Zur propositionalen Realisierung der Aufforderungsintention in der indirekten Rede am Beispiel des modernen Arabischen.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 42(6): 836-846.

Wittig, S. (1989). “Bemerkungen zur Wortstellung im einfachen Deklarativsatz der modernen arabischen Schriftsprache.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 42(1): 71-89.

Wittig, S. (1990). “Valence Patterns and Sentence Structures of Arabic Functional Verb Complexes-Syntactic Analysis, I.” Journal of Arabic Linguistics 21(7-29).

Wittig, S. (1991). “Fa- als Indikator arabischer Kausalsatze.” Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung 44(2): 180-189.

Wittig, S. (1992). “Zur semantischen und syntaktischen Struktur ornativer und kombinativer Beforderungsverben im modernen Arabischen.” Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies 60(1): 1-15.

Witztum, A. and M. I. Gruber (1991). “Hebrew, Aramaic and Arabic Names for Plants in the Mint Family.” Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects/Ketav-'Et le-Heqer ha-Lashon 56(2): 147-151.

Woidich, M. and P. Behnstedt (1980). “Zum Sprachatlas von Agypten.” Zeitschrift für Arabische Linguistik 5: 176-192.

Woidich, M. (1980). Illi als Konjunktion im Kairenischen. Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik. W. Diem and S. Wild. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz: 224-238.



Woidich, M. (1980). Das mesopotamische Arabisch. Wiesbaden, Otto Harrassowitz.

Woidich, M. (1989). “Illi 'That', Illi 'Because', and zayy illi 'As If': On the Reinterpretation of Relative Sentence Structures in Cairo Arabic.” Mediterranean Language Review 4-5: 109-128.

Wolf, H. J. (1985). “Knacklaut in Orgosolo: Uberlegungen zur sardischen Lautchronologie.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie 101(3-4): 269-311.

Wolf, H. J. (1985). “Glottal Stop in Orgosolo: Thoughts on Sardinian Phonetic Chronology.” Zeitschrift für romanische Philologie 101(3-4): 269-311.

Wolfe, R. (1990). Ibn Mada' al-Qurtubi's Kitab ar-Radd 'ala n-Nuhat: An Historical Misnomer. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. K. Versteegh and M. G. Carter. Amsterdam, Benjamins. 2: 295-304.

Wolfson, N. (1981). “Compliments in cross-cultural perspective.” TESOL Quarterly 15(2): 117-34.

Wood, R. E. (1979). “Language Choice in Transnational Radio Broadcasting.” Journal of Communication 29(2): 112-123.

Wood, S. A. J. (1992). A Radiographic and Model Study of the Tense vs. Lax Contrast in Vowels. Sixth International Phonology Meeting, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Wood , R. E. (1984). “Saudi Arabian English.” English Language Research Journal 4: 83-98.

Works, N. M. (1985). A Study of the Use of English Sentence Stress for the Comprehension of Meaning by Adult Second Language Learners, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.Dissertation Abstracts International 46:3340A

Xrakovskij, V. S. (1988). Resultative and Passive in Arabic. Typology of Resultative Constructions. V. P. Nedjalkov and B. Comrie. Amsterdam, Benjamins: 327-339.

Yaqub, B. A., G. G. Gascon, et al. (1988). “Pure Word Deafness (Acquired Verbal Auditory Agnosia) in Arabic Speaking Patient.” Brain 111(2): 457-466.

Yasin, R. B. and J. Owens (1984). “The Bduul Dialect of Jordan.” Anthropological Linguistics 26(2): 202-232.

Yassin, M. A. F. (1981). “Arabs communicating: a sociolinguistic approach.” The Incorporated Linguist 20(3): 96-9.

Yassin, M. A. F. (1986). “The Arabian Way With Names: A Sociolinguistic Approach.” Linguistics 25(2): 77-82.

Yassin, M. A. F. (1988). “Spoken Arabic Proverbs.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 51(3): 59-68.

Yazbeck-Haddad, K. (1990). “Polyglot and Francophile.” Le Francais dans le Monde supplement 13: 43-45.

Yetiv, I. (1987). 1,001 Proverbs From Tunisia. Washington D.C., Three Continents Press, Inc.

Yip, M. (1988). “Template Morphology and the Direction of Association.” Natural Language & Linguistic Theory 6(4): 551-577.

Yokwe, E. M. (1984). “Arabicization and language policy in the Sudan.” Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 14(2): 149-70.

Yokwe, E. M. (1985). “The diversity of Juba Arabic.” Studies in African Linguistics supplement 9: 323-8.

Younes, M. (1982). Problems in the Segmental Phonology of Palestinian Arabic, University of Texas at Austin.

Younes, M. (1993). Emphasis Spread in Two Arabic Dialects. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V. M. Eid and C. Holes. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. V: 119-148.

Younes, M. A. (1994). On Emphasis and /r/ in Arabic. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic



Linguistics. M. Eid, V. Cantarino and K. Walters. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins. 115: 215-235.

Young, M. J. L. (1982). “An Arabic Almanac of favourable and unfavourable days.” Journal of Semitic Studies 27(2): 261-79.

Youssef, A. and E. Simpkins (1985). “Parent Attitudes on Americanization and Bilingual Education: The Dearborn, Detroit, and Farmington Study.” The Bilingual Review 12(3): 190-197.

Youssi, A. (1983). “La Triglossie dans la typologie linguistique.” La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Internationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle 19(2): 71-83.

Youssi, A. (1992). Grammaire et lexique de l'arabe marocain moderne. Casablanca, Editin Wallada.

Yudakin, A. P. (1982). “Lexical-grammatical laws of the evolution of the active participle [Using Indo-European and Semitic material].” Voprosy yazykoznaniya 31(2): 59-67.

Zahniser, A. H. M. (1991). “The Word of God and the Apostleship of Isa: A Narrative Analysis of Al'Imran (3): 33-62.” Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS) 36(1): 77-112.

Zahri, M. (1992). Metaphor and Translation, University of Salford.DAI No. BRD-96481

Zav'ialova, O. I. (1992). “Sino-musul'manskie teksty: Grafika - fonologiia - morfonololgiia.” Voprosy Iazykoznaniia 6: 113-122.

Zavadovskii, I. N. (1981). Mavritanskii dialekt arabskogo iazyka: Khassaniia. Moscow, Nauka.

Zemanek, P. (1990). “A Propos de la pharyngalisation et la glottalisation en arabe.” Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies 58(2): 125-134.

Zhalai, V. Y. (1984). “Peculiarities of the Language Situation in Developing Countries (With Special Reference fo Tunisia).” Movoznavsto 18(1(103)): 54-58.

Zhalai , V. Y. (1984). “Osoblivosti movnoi situatsii v krainakh, shcho rozvivayut’sya (na materiali Tunis’koi respubliki).” Movoznavstvo 18(1(103)): 54-8.

Ziadah, M. (1984). “Présentation linguistique d'une modele de synthese morphologique de l'arabe littéraire.” CGE: Compte-rendu: 45.

Ziadeh, F. (1986). “Prosody and the Initial Formation of Classical Arabic.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 106(2): 333-338.

Zimmer, K. (1985). “Arabic loanwords and Turkish phonological structure.” International Journal of American Linguistics 51(4): 623-5.

Ziv, Y. (1988). “Naming Places.” A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate Subjects 53(1-2): 126-131.

Zizi, A. (1984). “L'Enseignement des sciences: Entre deux langues.” Le Francais dans le Monde 189: 50-53.

Zollinger, B. E. (1987). “Sociolinguistic and other aspects influencing the joint literacy project in Southern Sudan.” Notes on Literacy supplement 3: 20-34.

Zubin, D. A. and S. Svorou (1984). “Perceptual schemata in the spatial lexicon: a cross-linguistic study.” Papers from the Parasessions, Chicago Linguistic Society: 346-58.

Zughoul, M. R. (1980). “Diglossia in Arabic: investigating solutions.” Anthropological Linguistics 22(5): 201-17.

Zughoul, M. R. and L. Taminian (1984). “The linguistic attitudes of Arab University students: factorial structure and intervening variables.” International Journal of the Sociology of Language 50: 155-79.
